JP6802344B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during the small hit game, the blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens the open / close region, and the game ball enters the open / close region. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. As the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

In the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. When a ball is hit, a random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The display means fluctuates and stops the identification symbol, and the game is played according to the stop display mode of the identification symbol. It is to notify the person.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since a big hit or a small hit is triggered by a start opening prize, many players mainly pay attention to whether or not to win the start opening prize. However, the movement of the attacker that guides the game ball to the V winning opening is less noticeable because the movement frequency is low, and it may not even be noticed that the attacker has moved. In particular, in the short-time game state, since the time from the start opening winning to the V winning via the small hit is short, the big hit is suddenly notified before confirming the operation of the attacker, and as a result, it is not noticed. Often.

Therefore, the player hits the game ball into the area where the V winning opening is arranged during the time-saving game, confirms the starting prize while looking at the vicinity of the electric tulip, and notifies that the game ball has won the V winning opening. The number of time reductions will be exhausted indiscriminately, hoping that the production will occur or that the identification information will be gathered and become a big hit. As described above, conventionally, it has been difficult to give a player a special interest in a short-time game state.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the interest of the game.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine of the present invention is a first variable winning device (for example, a blade member 510) provided with a first displacement member (for example, a blade member 510) capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which it is difficult to win and a second state in which it is easy to win. 1st non-electric accessory 415b) and
A second variable winning device (for example, a second non-electric accessory 415c) provided with a second displacement member (for example, a blade member 512) capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which it is difficult to win and a second state in which it is easy to win. )When,
A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) provided in the first variable winning device, and
A second starting area (for example, a second starting port 414c) provided in the second variable winning device, and
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states.
A first variable display game control means capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a first special symbol game) based on the passage of the game ball through the first starting region, and
A second variable display game control means capable of executing a second variable display game (for example, a second special symbol game) based on the passage of the game ball through the second starting region, and
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling an effect execution means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 50) for executing an effect.
The game state control means
Normal game state and
A first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) in which the first displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than the normal gaming state.
It is possible to control the second specific gaming state (for example, the second time-saving gaming state) in which the second displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state.
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, navigation display 56) suggesting that the second displacement member is released.
When the second displacement member is opened in the first specific gaming state, the suggestion effect can be executed.
It is characterized by that.
Further, the game machine of the present invention is provided with a third displacement member (for example, an opening / closing winning opening 420) capable of converting the game ball into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to win and a second state in which the game ball is easy to win. 3 variable prize device (for example, V prize device 422) and
A specific area (for example, V winning opening 424 or V winning ball sensor 119) provided in the third variable winning device is provided.
When the first variable display game or the second variable display game has a special result, it is possible to generate a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
When the second variation display game has a predetermined result, by setting the third displacement member in the second state, it is possible to easily win a game ball in the specific area (for example, a predetermined gaming state (for example). , Small hit game state) can be generated,
The specific area can generate the special gaming state based on the passage of the gaming ball.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.
The special gaming state generated based on the passage to the specific area shifts to the second special gaming state rather than the special gaming state generated based on the first variable display game having the special result. High percentage,
It is characterized by that.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (right-handed area) and a second area (right-handed area) that are different from each other in the game area. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium (for example, a game ball) so as to hit the game medium into the left-handed area). ), A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a second starting area arranged in the first area through which the game medium can pass. (For example, a special game capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player by using either the second starting port 414c), the passing of the game medium in the first starting area, or the passing of the game medium in the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323, S329 in FIG. 36) for determining whether or not to shift to a state (for example, a big hit game state and a small hit game state) with a predetermined probability. Identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and game state control that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. Either the means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) and the first state, which is arranged in the first starting area and is easy to capture the game medium, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium. A first displacement member (for example, a blade member 510 of the first non-electric accessory 415b) that is switchable and guides the game medium to the first starting region when the game medium is captured in the first state, and the first. 2 It is arranged in the starting area and can be switched between the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture. When the game medium is captured in the first state, the said state is applicable. The first displacement member is brought into the first state in conjunction with the passage of the game medium and the second displacement member (for example, the blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region. Along with switching, the first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media by the first displacement member is interlocked with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism that switches the second displacement member to the first state and switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media by the second displacement member ( For example, a second actuating mechanism 513), a passage region arranged in the first region and through which the game medium can pass (for example, a ball passage detector 416), and a passage region arranged in the first region and passing through the passage region. A third displacement member that can be switched between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and is electrically operable (for example, a flat plate member of an ordinary electric accessory 415a). 520) and the drive determination means (for example,) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, triggered by the passage of the game medium through the passing region. The main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26), the driving means for switching the third displacement member to the first state (for example, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), and the game medium captured by the third displacement member are the first. Displacement means (for example, distribution device 506) for allocating to either the first passage leading to the first actuating mechanism and the second passage leading to the second actuating mechanism, and the effect means for performing various effects (for example, liquid crystal display). The device 50) and the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201, steps S1014 and S1015 in FIG. 38) for controlling the effect means are provided, and the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second start area. The lottery is more advantageous than the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting region (table shown in FIG. 7), and in the effect control means, the launched game medium is the third displacement member. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the firing timing that is likely to be guided to the second passage when captured by (for example, sub CPU 201, steps S1063 and S1065 in FIG. 48).

According to the above configuration, when the launched game medium is captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520), the captured game medium is likely to be guided to the second passage by notifying the launch timing. , The player is less likely to miss the firing timing at which the second displacement member (blade member 512), which is advantageous to him / herself, can be put into the first state (open state). In this way, it becomes possible for the player himself to provide the player with a new interest that he / she can acquire a state advantageous to himself / herself by operating the launching means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible to provide various game machines.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the game state control means captures the game state after the end of the special game state when the third displacement member is switched to the first state. A first specific state (for example, a first time-saving game state) in which the medium is highly likely to be guided by the distribution means to the first passage, and the lottery means continues until a predetermined number of lottery is performed. The possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured when the third displacement member is switched to the first state to the first passage is lower than that of the first specific state and leads to the second passage. A game state setting means (for example, a game state setting means) that is set to include a second specific state (for example, a second time-saving game state) that continues until a predetermined number of lottery is performed by the lottery means in a state with a high possibility. , Main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24), and the effect control means said that when the launched game medium is captured by the third displacement member in the second specific state, the game medium is said to be It is characterized in that it can notify the firing timing that is likely to be guided to the second passage (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S1071 and S1072 in FIG. 24).

According to the above configuration, the player ensures that the game medium is passed through the second starting area in the second specific state in which the game medium is easily passed through the second starting area, which is a trigger for the lottery that is advantageous to the player. Will be able to operate the launcher.

Further, in the above configuration, the game machine of the present invention changes the normal symbol when the game medium passes through the passing region, and notifies the player of the determination result of the drive determination means according to the stop display mode of the normal symbol. The distribution control means further includes a normal symbol display means (for example, a normal symbol display device 434) and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S41 in FIG. 12). When the game medium is fired at the time when the normal symbol display means stops the normal symbol, the game medium is distributed to the first passage after the distribution to the second passage. It is performed at the timing of reaching the first passage (for example, main CPU 101, steps S271 and S272 in FIG. 30), and the effect control means is such that the game medium launched during the period when the normal symbol is fluctuating is the first. It is characterized by performing an effect of notifying that it is the timing to reach the second passage during the period of distribution to the two passages (for example, the sub CPU 201, the launch timing notification setting process of FIG. 49).

According to the above configuration, even if the game medium is fired when the normal symbol display means stops the normal symbol, the second displacement member which is advantageous to the player cannot be put into the first state, so that the normal symbol fluctuates. It becomes possible to make the player aware that the game medium is fired during the period. In addition, by performing an effect of notifying that it is the timing to reach the second passage while the normal symbol is fluctuating, the player is made aware that the game medium is fired during this effect. Becomes possible. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a new hobby that draws attention to ordinary symbols.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the third displacement member is driven by a plurality of drive patterns (for example, the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 415a in the opening patterns E and F in FIG. 47). It is a feature.

According to the above configuration, the third displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 415a) is driven by a plurality of drive patterns, so that, for example, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is put into the first state. The launch timing will change. Therefore, it is possible to give variety to the effect of notifying the launch timing of the game medium.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the effect control means operates the launching means when the launched game medium reaches the first passage during the period of distribution to the first passage. It is characterized in that the effect means is controlled so as to perform an effect to be operated by using the hand (for example, the process of FIG. 50 by the sub CPU 201, the game effect display 58 of FIG. 51 (c)).

According to the above configuration, by performing an effect of operating the launching means by using the hand operating the launching means according to the effect means, if the player operates according to the effect, the launched game medium is distributed to the first passage. In, the player is in a state of not operating the launching means. In this way, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member, which is disadvantageous for the player, from being in the first state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming in a pachinko gaming machine.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the schematic structure in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance of the game board 40 in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part structure of the winning unit 415 in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement of the photo sensor 508 (509) in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the distribution device 506 in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the distribution device 506 in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the specification in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the distribution device 506 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the effect screen in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the effect screen in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the specification in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the specification in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen to the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen to the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the specification in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the specification in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit opening pattern and attacker opening pattern in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Configuration of pachinko machine 1]
An overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 2 is a front view showing an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 40 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a glass door 10, a launching device 20, a base door 30, a game board 40, a wooden frame 60, a liquid crystal display device 50 for displaying an image, a payout unit 70, and a substrate. It is composed of a unit 80 and the like.

The glass door 10 is pivotally attached to the base door 30 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 11 is formed in the center of the glass door 10, and a protective glass 12 having transparency is arranged in the opening 11. The protective glass 12 is arranged so as to face the front surface of the game board 40 with the glass door 10 closed.

Further, the glass door 10 is provided with a dish unit 13, a speaker 14, and an effect button 16 below the opening 11. The plate unit 13 is a unit body in which the upper plate 131 and the lower plate 132 located below the upper plate 131 are integrated. The upper plate 131 and the lower plate 132 are formed with payout outlets for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), and when the predetermined payout conditions are met, the game balls are discharged. In particular, the upper plate 131 stores a game ball for firing in the game area 41 described later. Further, the speaker 14 is arranged inside the lower plate 132. The effect button 16 is arranged at the edge of the upper plate 131.

The launcher 20 is arranged at the lower right of the base door 30. The launcher 20 includes a launch handle 21 that can be operated by the player and a panel body 22 that fits into the lower right corner of the dish unit 13. The firing handle 21 is rotatable and is provided on the front side of the panel body 22. When the dish unit 13 and the launching device 20 are arranged on the base door 30, the panel body 22 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 13. Then, the pachinko game can be advanced by operating the firing handle 21 by the player.

A launch solenoid (not shown) for launching a game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 22. Further, a touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 21. Inside the firing handle 21, a firing volume is provided that changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 21 and changes the power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown).

When the touch sensor (not shown) is touched by the player, it is detected that the launch handle 21 is grasped by the player. When the firing handle 21 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle, and the resistance value at this time. The corresponding power is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 131 are sequentially launched into the game area 41 described later on the game board 40, and the game is advanced. When the launch stop button (not shown) is pressed, the launch of the game ball is stopped even when the launch handle 21 is held and rotated.

The base door 30 is pivotally attached to the wooden frame 60 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 40 is arranged behind the protective glass 12 on the base door 30.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 40 is made of a plate-shaped resin, and is made of various materials such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin. Further, on the front side of the game board 40, a game area 41 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down, an out port 42 arranged at the lowermost part of the game area 41, and an outer side of the game area 41 are provided. It has an LED unit 43 arranged at the lower right side.

The game board 40 is provided with an arc-shaped guide rail 411 that defines the game area 41, and a plurality of game nails 412 are driven into the game area 41. Further, in the game area 41, the game board 40 has a central base plate 413, a central start port 414a, a first start port 414b, a second start port 414c, a winning unit 415, a ball passage detector 416, a shutter 417, and a large prize. Game members such as a mouth 418, a general winning mouth 419a, 419b, 419c, a V winning device 422, and a touch sensor 450 are arranged.

The guide rail 411 is composed of an outer rail 411a and an inner rail 411b arranged inside the outer rail 411a.

The central base plate 413 is a frame-shaped member made of a resin material, and is arranged in an opening formed in the central portion of the game board 40. The central base plate 413 includes a right rail portion 413a, a left rail portion 413b, a passage port 413c, a stage 413d, and a right guide portion 413e. The right rail portion 413a and the left rail portion 413b are formed on the upper portion of the central base plate 413 and guide the game ball launched on the board surface of the game board 40. The game ball that has passed the uppermost portion of the game area 41 flows down to the right area of the game area 41 while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory by the guide of the right rail portion 413a. The game ball that does not exceed the uppermost portion of the game area 41 moves to the left area of the game area 41 by the guide of the left rail portion 413b. Here, the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the frame of the central base plate 413 when the game board 40 is viewed from the front.

Further, the passage port 413c is a portion formed on the left side of the central base plate 413 through which the game ball can pass. The stage 413d is formed in the lower part of the central base plate 413 and extends to the opening side of the game board 40.

The game ball that has passed through the passage port 413c from the left side of the central base plate 413 rolls on the stage 413d of the game board 40 and flows down from the stage 413d to the board surface of the game board 40.

The right guide portion 413e is formed on the right side of the central base plate 413, and is formed by a pair of guide plates that guide both side portions of the game ball and allow them to flow downward. The game ball that has passed through the right rail portion 413a flows down the right region in the game region 41 while being guided by the right guide portion 413e.

The game ball launched by the launching device 20 (see FIG. 1 and the like) is guided by the guide rail 411 and moves to the upper part of the game area 41, and advances due to a collision with the game nail 412, the central base plate 413, and the like. It flows down toward the lower part of the game area 41 while changing the direction. For example, the player drives a game ball into the left side of the central base plate 413 and causes the game ball to flow down the left side of the central base plate 413 (so-called left-handed), and a launch handle 21 of the launching device 20 (FIG. 1, etc.). Rotate the game ball to the right side to the maximum, drive the game ball to the right side of the central base plate 413, and let the game ball flow down the right side of the central base plate 413 through the right rail portion 413a and the right guide portion 413e (see). You can proceed with the pachinko game by selecting so-called right-handed).

The central starting port 414a is arranged below the central base plate 413 and below the center of the game area 41. Here, a recess is formed in the center of the stage 413d, and the central starting port 414a is arranged directly below the recess. That is, the game ball on the recess in the center of the stage 413d can easily enter the central starting port 414a. A winning area is provided in the central starting port 414a. A central starting port winning ball sensor 116a (see FIG. 10) is provided in this winning area.

The first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c are arranged in the lower right region of the game area 41. A winning area is provided in each of the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c. The winning area is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 116b (see FIG. 10) and a second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, various types of game boards 40 are provided so that the central starting port 414a can be won only by left-handed hitting, and the first starting opening 414b and the second starting opening 414c can be won only by right-handed hitting. Game members are arranged. As described above, the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c are examples of the first starting area and the second starting area.

The winning unit 415 is arranged in the lower right area of the game area 41. The winning unit 415 includes an ordinary electric accessory 415a, a first non-electric accessory 415b, a second non-electric accessory 415c, a cover plate 415d, and the like, and is a unit body in which these members are integrated. When the winning unit 415 is arranged on the game board 40, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is arranged directly below the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e, and further, the second non-electric accessory 415c and the first non-electric accessory 415c. Objects 415b are sequentially arranged in the lower right side of the game area 41.

The ordinary electric accessory 415a has a flat plate member 520 (see FIG. 5) that can project and retract with respect to the plate surface of the game board 40, and a solenoid iron core that is electrically driven and can project and retract from the main body. It is equipped with an accessory solenoid 111 (see FIG. 10). The flat plate member 520 is indirectly connected to the solenoid core and slides in conjunction with the solenoid core. As described above, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is an example of the third displacement member.

The first non-electric accessory 415b includes a blade member 510 rotatably attached to the main body of the winning unit 415 and a first operating mechanism 511 (see FIG. 5) that rotates the blade member 510 in conjunction with the movement of the game ball. ) And. As shown in FIG. 6, the blade member 510 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and the central portion thereof is rotatably supported and rotates along the board surface of the game board 40. The first operating mechanism 511 (see FIG. 5) is switched between an open state in which the game ball is easy to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 510 and a closed state in which it is difficult to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 510.

The second non-electric accessory 415c has a blade member 512 rotatably attached to the main body of the winning unit 415 and a second operating mechanism 513 that rotates the blade member 512 in conjunction with the movement of the game ball (see FIG. 5). ) And. As shown in FIG. 6, the blade member 512 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and its central portion is rotatably supported and rotates along the board surface of the game board 40. The second operating mechanism 513 (see FIG. 5) is switched between an open state in which the game ball is easy to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 512 and a closed state in which it is difficult to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 512.

The first non-electric accessory 415b and the second non-electric accessory 415c are accessories generally referred to as a mechanical chew.

When the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a protrudes and the game ball flowing down from above is caught by riding on the flat plate member 520, the game ball is a passage port formed in the game board 40 (for example, FIG. 61). It moves to the back side of the board through the opening 40a). An ordinary electric accessory ball entry sensor 122 (see FIG. 10) is arranged in the vicinity of the passage port. Although the details will be described later, the winning unit 415 has a configuration in which the game ball captured by the flat plate member 520 is distributed to either the first operating mechanism 511 (see FIG. 5) or the second operating mechanism 513 (see FIG. 5). doing. Therefore, when the flat plate member 520 picks up the game ball, either the blade member 510 or the blade member 512 opens.

The cover plate 415d is a decorative member that covers the lower right region of the game region 41. The front of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, the first non-electric accessory 415b, the second non-electric accessory 415c, and the like is covered with the cover plate 415d. A guide path 500 extending to a ridge is formed on the back surface of the cover plate 415d, and when the cover plate 415d is mounted on the game board 40, the guide path 500 is arranged below the ordinary electric accessory 415a. The cover.

The guideway 500 receives a game ball that has fallen from the side of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and has a slope portion 501 extending diagonally so as to be guided between the central base plate 413 and the winning unit 415, and a lower end of the slope portion 501. It has a guide portion 502 from the to the large winning opening 418. The guide portion 502 is formed in two stages, and holes are formed at the bases of the steps. In these two holes, the hole on the downstream side functions as the first starting port 414b, and the hole on the upstream side functions as the first starting port 414b.

The rotation shaft of the blade member 510 of the first non-electric accessory 415b is arranged on the downstream side with respect to the first starting port 414b, and in the closed state, the tip portion is upstream of the first starting port 414b in the guide path 500. The first starting port 414b of the blade member 510 is closed by the blade member 510 by abutting or approaching to the side. In the open state, the first starting port 414b is opened by separating the tip portion of the blade member 510 from the guide path 500, and an arc-shaped slope toward the first starting port 414b is formed on the blade member 510. By opening the blade member 510 in this way, the game ball is easily put on, and the game ball on the blade member 510 moves to the first starting port 414b side. That is, by opening the blade member 510, the game ball can easily enter the first starting port 414b.

Similarly, the rotation shaft of the blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c is also arranged on the downstream side with respect to the second starting port 414c, and in the closed state, the tip of the blade member 512 is the second in the guide path 500. The second starting port 414c is closed by the blade member 512 by abutting or approaching the upstream side of the two starting port 414c. In the open state, the tip of the blade member 512 is separated from the guide path 500 to open the second starting port 414c, and an arc-shaped slope toward the second starting port 414c is formed on the blade member 512. As described above, the blade member 512 is opened so that the game ball can easily ride on the blade member 512, and the game ball on the blade member 512 moves to the second starting port 414c side. That is, by opening the blade member 512, the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 414c.

As described above, the first non-electric accessory 415b is arranged in the first starting region (first starting port 414b), and it is difficult to capture the game ball in the first state (open state) in which the game ball is easily captured. This is an example of a first displacement member that can be switched to either a second state (closed state) and guides the game ball to the first starting region when the game ball is captured in the first state. The second non-electric accessory 415c is arranged in the second starting region (second starting port 414c), and the first state (open state) in which the game ball is easily captured and the second state (open state) in which the game ball is difficult to be captured (the second state). It is an example of a second displacement member that can be switched to either a closed state (closed state) and guides the game ball to the second starting region when the game ball is captured in the first state.

[Structure of winning unit 415]
Here, the configuration of the main part of the winning unit 415 will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning unit 415 further includes a first passage 504, a second passage 505, a distribution device 506, a first photo sensor 508, and a second photo sensor 509. The first passage 504 is a downwardly inclined passage that guides the game ball captured by the flat plate member 520 to the first operating mechanism 511. The second passage 505 is a downwardly inclined passage that guides the game ball captured by the flat plate member 520 to the second operating mechanism 513. The upper ends of the first passage 504 and the second passage 505 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and the upper ends of the ridges separating the first passage 504 and the second passage 505 are the first passage 504 and the first passage 504. It is a branch point with the two passages 505.

The distribution device 506 distributes the game ball supplemented by the flat plate member 520 to either the first passage 504 or the second passage 505.

The blade member 510 of the first non-electric accessory 415b is arranged on the board surface of the game board 40, and the first operating mechanism 511 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 40. The blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c is arranged on the board surface of the game board 40, and the second operating mechanism 513 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 40.

The game ball on the blade member 510 is guided to the first starting port 414b, passes through the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b, and is sent to the first operating mechanism 511. When a predetermined number of game balls (two in the present embodiment) enter the first starting port 414b, the first operating mechanism 511 rotates the blade member 510 to close the first starting port 414b. To do.

The game ball on the blade member 512 is guided to the second starting port 414c, passes through the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c, and is sent to the second operating mechanism 513. The second operating mechanism 513 rotates the blade member 512 when the game ball enters the second starting port 414c, and closes the second starting port 414c. As described above, the blade member 510 of the first non-electric accessory 415b is an example of the first displacement member, and the blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c is an example of the second displacement member.

[Main part configuration and operation of sorting device 506]
The distribution device 506 includes a rectangular distribution plate 507 and a distribution solenoid 121.
The distribution plate 507 has a rotation shaft on one side of the rectangle, and the rotation shaft is erected at a branch point between the first passage 504 and the second passage 505. As a result, the distribution plate 507 becomes rotatable, and by rotating the distribution plate 507, the first open state in which the first passage 504 is opened and the second passage 505 is closed, and the first passage 504 are opened. It becomes possible to switch to the second open state in which the second passage 505 is opened by closing.

The distribution solenoid 121 is a drive source for rotating the distribution plate 507. By driving and controlling the distribution solenoid 121, it is possible to switch between the first open state and the second open state alternately.

When the distribution device 506 is in the first open state, as shown in FIG. 5A, the game ball supplemented by the ordinary electric accessory 415a is sent from the first passage 504 to the first operating mechanism 511. .. The first actuating mechanism 511 rotates the blade member 510 in the opening direction when the game ball is sent.

When the distribution device 506 is in the second open state, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the game ball supplemented by the ordinary electric accessory 415a is sent from the second passage 505 to the second operating mechanism 513. .. The second operating mechanism 513 rotates the blade member 512 in the closing direction when the game ball is sent. In this way, the distribution device 506 guides the game medium captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520) to the first passage leading to the first operating mechanism (first operating mechanism 511) and the second operating mechanism. This is an example of a distribution means for distributing to any of the second passages. The first operating mechanism 511 switches the first displacement member (blade member 510) to the first state (open state) in conjunction with the passage of the game medium (game ball), and at the same time, the first displacement member (blade member 510). Is an example of a first operating mechanism that switches from a first state (open state) to a second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media. The second operating mechanism 513 switches the second displacement member (blade member 512) to the first state (open state) in conjunction with the passage of the game medium (game ball), and the second displacement member (blade member 512). Is an example of a second operating mechanism that switches from the first state (open state) to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media.

Then, as described above, when the game balls are sent from the blade member 510 to the first operating mechanism 511 and from the blade member 512 to the second operating mechanism 513, the blade members 510 and 512 are closed. The first actuating mechanism 511 and the second actuating mechanism 513 are such that the blade members 510 and 512 are closed when a plurality of game balls (for example, two) are sent from the blade member 510 and the blade member 512. It may be configured. According to the above-described embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 415a, the second non-electric accessory 415c, and the first non-electric accessory 415b are arranged in this order from the upstream side, but these three accessories are the games. The order does not matter as long as it is arranged in the right side area in the area 41.

[Arrangement of the first photo sensor 508]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the first photosensor 508 and the second photosensor 509, and FIG. 6A is a blade member 510 in which the first photosensor 508 (second photosensor 509) is arranged. (B) is a front view of (blade member 512), FIG. 6 (b) is a side view of a blade member 510 (blade member 512) on which a first photo sensor 508 (second photo sensor 509) is arranged, and FIG. 6 (c) is a side view. , The first photosensor 508 (second photosensor 509) is a front view showing a state in which the rotation of the blade member 510 (blade member 512) is detected.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first photosensor 508 includes a light emitting element 508a and a light receiving element 508b. The second photosensor 509 includes a light emitting element 509a and a light receiving element 509b.

The arrangement of the first photo sensor 508 will be described. In FIG. 6, the light emitting element 508a is arranged on the back surface of the cover plate 415d, the light receiving element 508b is arranged on the opposite portion of the light emitting element 508a, and the base end of the blade member 510 is rotated by the rotation of the blade member 510. The unit passes between the light emitting element 508a and the light receiving element 508b.

The light emitting element 508a irradiates light toward the light receiving element 508b, and the light receiving element 508b detects the light from the light emitting element 508a. In the closed state where the tip of the blade member 510 is in contact with the guide path 500, the base end of the blade member 510 is positioned between the light emitting element 508a and the light receiving element 508b, so that the light from the light emitting element 508a is the blade. The light receiving element 508b does not receive light because it is blocked by the base end portion of the member 510.

In the present embodiment, the positions of the light emitting element 508a and the light receiving element 508b, and the shape of the base end portion of the blade member 510 that functions as a detection piece are such that the blade member 510 rotates as shown in FIG. 6C. When the gap between the tip of the blade member 510 and the guide path 500 becomes about half (radius) of the diameter of the game ball, the base end of the blade member 510 comes off from the optical path of the light emitting element 508a, and the light emitting element 508a It is set so that the light from the light receiving element 508b can reach the light receiving element 508b. That is, the first photo sensor 508 makes it possible to determine whether or not the diameter of the gap game ball between the tip of the blade member 510 and the guide path 500 is open by half or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, similarly, in the second photosensor 509, the blade member 512 rotates in the positions of the light emitting element 509a and the light receiving element 509b and the shape of the base end portion of the blade member 512 that functions as a detection piece. When the gap between the tip of the blade member 512 and the guide path 500 becomes about half (radius) of the diameter of the game ball, the base end of the blade member 510 comes off from the optical path of the light emitting element 509a, and the light emitting element The light from the 509a is set so as to reach the light receiving element 509b. That is, the second photosensor 509 makes it possible to determine whether or not the gap between the tip of the blade member 512 and the guide path 500 is open by more than half the diameter of the game ball.

In FIG. 4, the ball passage detector 416 includes a passage gate through which game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 10) arranged in the gate member. The ball passing detector 416 is arranged directly above the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and the passing gate of the ball passing detector 416 is arranged facing the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e. That is, the game ball launched into the right area in the game area 41 passes through the right guide portion 413e and flows down toward the passing gate, so that the game ball easily passes through the ball passing detector 416. As described above, the ball passage detector 416 is an example of a passage region through which the game medium can pass.

The shutter 417 is arranged below the central starting port 414a. The shutter 417 is configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state. The grand prize opening 418 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 417. The large winning opening 418 can be won when the shutter 417 is open, and cannot be won when the shutter 417 is closed. A winning area is provided in the large winning opening 418, and the large winning opening count sensor 113 (see FIG. 10) is provided in this winning area. In FIG. 4, the shutter 417 is arranged below the central starting port 414a, but if the position is such that the right-handed game ball can be captured, the position of the central starting port 414a is It can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be arranged in the region between the non-electric accessory 415b and the non-electric accessory 415c or in the slope portion 501 of the guide path 500. As described above, the shutter 417 is an example of the fifth displacement member which is arranged in the vicinity of the second displacement member (non-electric accessory 415c) and can be opened and closed in the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

The general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c are arranged in the area on the left side of the game area 41. The game balls that have entered the general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c pass through a common path, and the general winning ball sensor 114a (see FIG. 10) is provided at a predetermined portion of the common path.

The V winning device 422 is arranged at the lower right side inside the central base plate 413, and has an opening / closing winning opening 420, an attacker 421, a guide path 423, a V winning opening 424, a loss opening 425, and a movable member 426. And have.

The opening / closing winning opening 420 is a passing opening formed in the lower right part of the central base plate 413 through which the game ball can pass, and an opening / closing winning opening count sensor that is installed near the passing opening and detects the game ball that has passed through the passing opening. It consists of 120 (see FIG. 10). When the game balls pass through the opening / closing winning opening 420, a predetermined number (three in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 71.

The attacker 421 is a member that opens and closes the opening / closing winning opening 420 arranged at the lower right side of the central base plate 413, which is composed of members along an arc shape. The base end portion of the attacker 421 is rotatably attached in the vicinity of the lower part of the opening / closing winning opening 420 in the central base plate 413. The attacker 421 is driven by the opening / closing winning opening solenoid 118 (see FIG. 10), and when the tip of the attacker 421 is in contact with or close to the opening / closing winning opening 420 on the central base plate 413, the opening / closing winning opening The 420 is closed and closed. When the tip of the attacker 421 is tilted toward the winning unit 415, the opening / closing winning opening 420 is opened. As described above, the attacker 421 is an example of a fourth displacement member capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which the game medium can be easily captured and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to capture. ..

The guideway 423 guides the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 and entered the inside of the central base plate 413, and a rectangular opening through which the game ball can pass is formed in the central portion of the guideway 423. Rectangle.

The V winning opening 424 is arranged directly below the opening formed in the central portion of the guide path 423. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the opening of the guideway 423 enters the V winning opening 424. The V winning opening 424 is provided with a V winning ball sensor 119 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning opening 424.

The loss opening 425 is arranged at the downstream end of the guide path 423, and a game ball that has fallen from the lower end of the guide path 423 enters the loss opening 425.

The movable member 426 is a rectangular plate-shaped member arranged in an opening formed in the central portion of the guide path 423. The downstream end of the movable member 426 is rotatably supported by the guide path 423. The movable member 426 is driven by the V winning opening solenoid 117 (see FIG. 10) and rotates upward to open directly above the V winning opening 424, and rotates downward from the V winning possible state. With the guide path 423 and the movable member 426 flush with each other, it is possible to alternately switch between the V winning impossible state in which the V winning opening 424 is closed directly above.

Therefore, when the game ball passes through the opening / closing winning opening 420, if the movable member 426 rotates upward and is in the V winning state, the movement of the game ball is restricted by the movable member 426, and the game ball is restricted. Drops and enters the V winning opening 424. When the movable member 426 does not rotate upward, the guide path 423 and the movable member 426 are flush with each other, so that the game ball enters the loss opening 425 and is collected on the back side of the game board 40. ..

When a game ball enters the V winning opening 424, it is called "V winning". Further, the big hit caused by the game ball winning the V winning opening 424 is called "V big hit". The game ball passes through the opening / closing winning opening 420 only when the attacker 421 is in the open state, and it is impossible for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is in the closed state. That is, there is a possibility of winning a V when the attacker 421 is in the open state, and there is no possibility of winning a V when the attacker 421 is in the closed state. In this way, the V winning opening 424 is arranged in the first region (the region on the right side of the gaming region 41), and the gaming state control means (main) is passed by the gaming medium captured by the fourth displacement member (attacker 421). This is an example of a special winning area that triggers the CPU 101) to shift the gaming state to the first special gaming state (V jackpot gaming state).

Further, the attacker 421 faces diagonally upward when it is in the open state, and the tip end portion of the attacker 421 is close to the lower end portion of the slope portion 501 of the guide path 500. Therefore, while the attacker 421 is in the open state, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. Further, when the attacker 421 is closed, the game ball passes between the central base plate 413 and the guide portion 502 in the guide path 500. Here, the second non-electric accessory 415c is arranged near the downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the attacker 421, and when the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened, the tip of the blade member 512 The part is close to the central base plate 413. In other words, when the attacker 421 is in the closed state and the second non-electric accessory 415c is in the open state, the game ball passing by the side of the attacker 421 enters the second non-electric accessory 415c. As a result, even if the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened immediately before the special gaming state (big hit gaming state, V jackpot gaming state, small hit gaming state), the attacker 421 immediately after the attacker 421 is closed. A game ball passing by the side enters the second non-electric accessory 415c. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the second non-electric accessory 415c, which is opened immediately before the special game state, to maintain the open state until the game after the end of the special game state.

According to the above-described embodiment, the attacker 421 is arranged on the upstream side of the second non-electric accessory 415c, but the attacker 421 is not limited to this and is located on the downstream side of the second non-electric accessory 415c. It may be arranged. As a result, the game ball preferentially heads toward the second non-electric accessory 415c while the second non-electric accessory 415c is open, and heads toward the attacker 421 after the second non-electric accessory 415c is closed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the second non-electric accessory 415c, which is opened immediately before the special gaming state, from maintaining the open state until the game after the end of the special gaming state.

The timing at which the movable member 426 is in the open state is related to the timing at which the attacker 421 is in the open state. For example, both the attacker 421 and the movable member 426 are normally closed. When the attacker 421 is in the open state, the movable member 426 may be in the open state at the same time or slightly later, and the movable member 426 may be in the closed state before the attacker 421 is closed.

The touch sensor 450 is a non-contact type touch sensor, and is arranged in a predetermined portion in the region on the right side of the game area 41, for example, near the right side of the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. The touch sensor 450 outputs a detection signal when the player holds his / her hand over the protective glass 12 (see FIG. 3) or touches the protective glass 12 toward the touch sensor 450.

The LED unit 43 is provided with a special symbol display device 431, a round number display device 432, a special symbol hold display device 433, a normal symbol display device 434, and a normal symbol hold display device 435.

The special symbol display device 431 is composed of a 7-segment LED, and the special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol) indicated by the 7-segment LED is repeatedly turned on and off of the 7-segment LED after a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied. Variable display and stop display. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 431, a game ball wins a prize at the central start port 414a, the first start port 414b, and the second start port 414c, and this game ball wins the central start port winning ball sensor 116a (see FIG. 10). ), When detected by the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b and the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c (see FIG. 10), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time elapses, the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined stop display mode. Stop display with. As described above, the special symbol is an example of the identification information. Further, the special symbol display device 431 is an example of the identification information display means.

The round number display device 432 is composed of a 7-segment LED and displays the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state described later.

In the present embodiment, 12 display lamps are arranged on the side of the round number display device 432. These display lamps constitute a special symbol hold display device 433, a normal symbol display device 434, and a normal symbol hold display device 435.

The special symbol hold display device 433 is composed of four display lamps, and the number of executions of the variation display in the special symbol display device 431 (so-called so-called) triggered by winning a prize in the central start port 414a or the first start port 414b. "Holding quantity", "Holding quantity related to special symbols") are displayed by turning on, off, or blinking.

Specifically, in the special symbol display device 433, for example, when the number of executions of the variation display in the special symbol display device 431 is held for one time, one display lamp lights up and the special symbol display device 431 is lit. When the number of executions of the variable display in is held for two times, the two display lamps light up. In this embodiment, there is no special symbol holding display device for holding the variable display in the special symbol display device 431 triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 414c.

The ordinary symbol display device 434 is composed of two display lamps, and the ordinary symbols indicated by these display lamps are alternately turned on and off after the predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. Variable display and stop display. Specifically, the normal symbol display device 434 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416 and the game ball is detected by the ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 10). After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode.

The normal symbol hold display device 435 is composed of four display lamps, and the number of times the variation display is executed in the normal symbol display device 434 (so-called "hold") triggered by the passage of the game ball through the ball passage detector 416. "Number" and "Number of reserved symbols related to normal symbols") are displayed by turning on, off, or blinking. Specifically, in the normal symbol display device 435, for example, when the number of executions of the variation display in the normal symbol display device 434 is held for one time, one display lamp lights up and the normal symbol display device 434 is lit. When the number of executions of the variable display in is held for two times, the two display lamps light up.

Returning to FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 50 is an example of the display means, is arranged behind (rear side) of the game board 40, and as shown in FIG. 4, the display area 51 is the center of the game board 40. It is arranged higher. In the display area 51, various images such as a derived symbol, an effect image, and a decorative image for decoration, which are identification symbols for effect, are displayed. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 50 is described as an example of the display means, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display means may be a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT display, a lamp, or the like.

The payout unit 70 includes a payout device 71 (see FIG. 10) described later, and shows the central start port 414a, the first start port 414b, the second start port 414c, the general winning openings 419a to 419c, and the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 418, When a game ball wins in the opening / closing winning opening 420, a preset number of game balls according to the type of each winning opening are paid out to the upper plate 131 or the lower plate 132.

The board unit 80 houses a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 10), a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 10), and the like, which will be described later, and controls the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Game state in pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal gaming state, a special gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state. In the normal game state, the shutter 417 and the attacker 421 are closed, the game ball cannot be accepted in the large winning opening 418 and the opening / closing winning opening 420, and there is an opportunity to win a prize in the first starting opening 414b or the second starting opening 414c. There are few playing states.

The special gaming state is a gaming state in which the shutter 417 or the attacker 421 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted by the large winning opening 418 or the opening / closing winning opening 420, and a predetermined game value can be given to the player. As the special game state, the shutter 417 is opened to give a large amount of game value to the player, and the V big hit game state and the attacker 421 are opened to give the player a game value. The small hit game state is included. As described above, the big hit game state and the V big hit game state correspond to the first special game state, and the small hit game state corresponds to the second special game state.

In the time-saving game state, the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c is easily opened, and the chances of winning a prize in the first starting port 414b or the second starting port 414c are increased, resulting in a special symbol. It is a game state in which the time for displaying the fluctuation of is shortened. There are two game states as the time-saving game state: the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, an open pattern composed of a combination of the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the drive pattern of the distribution device 506 is set. In particular, in the first time-saving game state, an opening pattern is set in which the first non-electric accessory 415b has more chances to open, and in the second time-saving game state, the second non-electric accessory 415c has more chances to open. The pattern is set.

The opening pattern of the first time-saving game state is set from the first opening pattern group having a plurality of types of opening patterns that increase the chances of opening the first non-electric accessory 415b, and the opening pattern of the second time-saving gaming state is , The second non-electric accessory 415c is set from the first opening pattern group having a plurality of types of opening patterns that increase the chances of opening.

Specifically, in the first open pattern group, the pattern in which the second non-electric accessory 415c is unlikely to open (see the opening pattern A in FIG. 8) and the possibility that the second non-electric accessory 415c opens are extremely small. It has a pattern (see opening pattern B in FIG. 8), and the second pattern group has a pattern in which the second non-electric accessory 415c almost certainly opens (see opening pattern C in FIG. 9) and a second non-electric accessory. It has a pattern (see opening pattern D in FIG. 9) in which the object 415c may not open. Which opening pattern is set in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is determined by a random number lottery by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. In the present embodiment, the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 415a are two patterns each in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, but may be one pattern or more than two patterns. In short, if the pattern is such that the second non-electric accessory 415c does not open in the first time-saving game state and the second non-electric accessory 415c opens in the second time-saving game state, the number of patterns is appropriately set. It is possible.

The player generally starts the game from the normal game state, and drives the game ball into the game area 41 of the game board 40 by the launching device 20. When the driven game ball wins the central starting port 414a, the special symbol of the special symbol display device 431 and the identification symbol (derived symbol) for effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when a game ball enters the central starting port 414a during the variable display of the special symbol, a special based on the entry of the game ball into the central starting port 414a until the special symbol displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variable display of the symbol is suspended. After that, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is started.

An upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variation display of the special symbol is suspended. In the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol due to the entry into the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b is performed. The maximum number of holdings is four, including the case where the ball enters the central starting port 414a and the case where the ball enters the first starting port 414b. Therefore, it is possible to hold up to 4 times.

Another condition (start of variable display of a predetermined special symbol) is that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started every time the variable display start condition of the predetermined special symbol is satisfied. In addition, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation display in the special symbol display device 431 triggered by winning the second starting port 414c is not reserved, the special symbol is stopped when the second starting port 414c is won. The special symbol display device 431 fluctuates and displays only in the displayed state.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is in a specific stop display mode, the normal gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. Among these specific stop display modes, the stop display mode that shifts to the big hit game state is the big hit, and the stop display mode that shifts to the small hit game state is the small hit. Further, the stop display mode of the special symbol other than the big hit or the small hit is the lost symbol, and when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal gaming state is maintained without shifting to the special gaming state. As described above, a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is changed or maintained depending on the result is referred to as a "special symbol game".

Here, the special symbol game is executed with the winning of the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b as a trigger, and the first special symbol game having a low probability of shifting to a small hit (including a probability of 0) and the second special symbol game. It is equipped with a second special symbol game that is executed when a prize is won in the starting port 414c and has a high probability of shifting to a small hit. Although details will be described later, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol game is executed, and in the time-saving gaming state, either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is executed. For convenience of the following description, the special symbol that fluctuates and is stopped and displayed when the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b are won is referred to as a first special symbol or a special symbol 1. Further, a special symbol that fluctuates and is stopped and displayed when a prize is won in the second starting port 414c is referred to as a second special symbol or a special symbol 2.

Further, in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbol display device 431, the derived symbol consisting of numbers, which is an example of the identification symbol, is variablely displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, except in a specific case. In addition, the special symbol display device 431 stops and displays the special symbol, and the derived symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

Further, in the special symbol display device 431, when the stop-displayed special symbol is in a specific stop display mode, an effect image for the player to grasp that it is a hit is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. To. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 431 in a specific display mode corresponding to a jackpot in which many balls can be obtained, for example, the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 The combination of the identification symbols for the effect displayed in the above is a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the same symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows), and further, an effect image showing a big hit. Is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

Then, when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 and the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the shutter 417 is driven so as to be in an open state in which the game ball is easily accepted. As a result, the large winning opening 418 is in an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball.

When the special symbol is set to a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 and the game state is shifted to the small hit game state, the attacker 421 is driven so as to be in an open state that easily accepts the game ball for a short time. Then, the opening / closing winning opening 420 is opened. The opening / closing winning opening 420 has an area (not shown) having the opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120 (see FIG. 10), and a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls wins in the area, or a predetermined time. The attacker 421 is driven to the open state until (for example, about 1.8 seconds) elapses. Then, when the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 wins a V in the V winning opening 424, it becomes a V big hit and shifts from the small hit gaming state to the V big hit gaming state. When the game state shifts to the V jackpot game state, the shutter 417 is driven so as to be in an open state in which the game ball can be easily received. As a result, the large winning opening 418 is in an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the shutter 417 is opened during the big hit game when the small hit is changed to the V big hit, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the attacker 421 is used even in the second and subsequent rounds. It may be a big hit game that opens up. At that time, it is desirable that the number of winnings per round is about 10. In addition, it is desirable to configure the prize balls to be switched from 3 to 10 by winning a prize in the opening / closing winning opening 420 during the V jackpot. Further, the shutter 417 and the attacker 421 are alternately opened and closed for each round so that, for example, when the attacker 421 is closed, the game ball that has passed near the attacker 421 is captured by the shutter 417, and is out during the big hit game. It is also possible to have as few balls as possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the V prize can be won in the small hit game state, but the V prize may be possible in the big hit game state. For example, a two-round jackpot with a short opening time of the attacker 421 may be provided so that a V prize can be won during the game of the two round jackpot, and the number of round games and the opening time may be increased by taking this V prize as an opportunity. ..

The large winning opening 418 provided on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 417 has an area (not shown) having the large winning opening count sensor 113 (see FIG. 5), and a predetermined number of game balls (not shown) in the area (not shown). The shutter 417 is driven to the open state until a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when either the condition of winning a predetermined number of game balls to the large winning opening 418 or the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied in the open state, the shutter 417 is driven and the large winning opening 418 is closed, which is difficult to accept the game balls. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game state or the V big hit game state, the big winning opening 418 repeats the transition from the closed state to the open state 15 times by driving the shutter 417, but the game is not limited to this. The open state in which the ball can be easily received may be set to an arbitrary number of times such as once or twice.

Further, when the specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 is a big hit, the gaming state shifts to the big hit gaming state among the special gaming states. Further, when the V prize is won, the game state shifts to the V jackpot game state. Then, in the big hit game state, a game in which the transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 418 is repeated 15 times is regarded as one round, and a round game in which this round is repeated is performed. Such a round game is counted as the number of rounds such as "1" round and "2" round. For example, the first round of a round game is also called the first round, and the second round is also called the second round. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 15 rounds, but the number of rounds is not limited to this, and the number of rounds can be any number. In the V jackpot game state, the opening and closing of the first attacker 421 is treated as the first round, and the shutter 417 is released in the second round. Then, the round game by opening and closing the shutter 417 is repeated 14 times, so that a total of 15 rounds of the round game are performed.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the central starting opening 414a, the first starting opening 414b, the second starting opening 414c, the general winning opening 419a to 419c, the large winning opening 418, and the opening / closing winning opening 420, the type of each winning opening is changed. A preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 131 or the lower plate 132 by the payout unit 70.

Further, when the game ball driven into the game area 41 by the player passes through the ball passage detector 416, the display lamp of the normal symbol display device 434 fluctuates and displays. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the display mode by the normal symbol hold display device 435 is switched until the normal symbol being displayed in the variation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the ball passage detector 416 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. Then, in the case where the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 434 indicates a hit, the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a is in a state of protruding for a predetermined time. For convenience of the following description, the protrusion of the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a is referred to as the ordinary electric accessory 415a being opened or in an open state. Similarly, the fact that the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a is retracted is referred to as the ordinary electric accessory 415a being closed or in a closed state.

As described above, a game in which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed, and the open / closed state of the normal electric accessory 415a (see FIG. 4) differs depending on the result is called a "normal symbol game".

When the big hit game state or the V big hit game state ends, the game may shift to the time-saving game state in which the time for displaying the variation of the special symbol is shortened. In the time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol game is set higher than the probability of hitting in the normal game state, and the chance that the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a protrudes increases. As a result, there are many opportunities for the game ball to ride on the flat plate member 520, and when the game ball on the flat plate member 520 rolls, there is an opportunity for the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c to open. Will increase.

[Basic specifications of pachinko game machine 1]
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 7A shows an example of the specifications of the special symbol game. In the first special symbol game, the big hit probability is 1/300, the small hit probability is 0/300, the number of holdings is 4, the prize balls of the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c are 3. There are 10 prize balls for general prize openings 419a to 419c, 10 prize balls for large prize openings 418, 3 prize balls for open / close prize openings 420, and the maximum number of counts for the open / close prize opening count sensor 120 is 1. The upper limit of the number of counts of the large prize opening count sensor 113 is set to 10.

In the second special symbol game, the jackpot probability is 1/300, the small hit probability is 299/300, the number of holdings is 4, the prize balls of the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c are 3. There are 10 prize balls for general winning openings 419a to 419c, 3 prize balls for opening and closing winning openings 420, the maximum number of counts for the opening and closing winning opening count sensor 120 is 1, and the number of counts for the large winning opening count sensor 113. The upper limit of is set to 10. Only the number of items on hold is classified into Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. It is common after that.

In the first special symbol game, the small hit probability is 0/300 and the small hit is not obtained, so that the V prize is not won. On the other hand, in the second special symbol game, since the probability of a small hit is extremely high, there is a possibility of shifting from the V winning to the V big hit gaming state. As described above, the small hit probability of 0/300 in the first special symbol game and the small hit probability of 299/300 in the second special symbol game means that the second starting area (second starting port). The probability of shifting to the second special game state (small hit) triggered by the passage of the game medium to 414c) is the second special game triggered by the passage of the game medium to the first starting area (first starting port 414b). This is an example of a higher probability of transitioning to a state (small hit). In addition, the small hit probability of the first special symbol game is not 0, but is set to a lower probability than the second special symbol game, for example, 1/300, and a game aiming for a small hit, a V prize, and a V big hit from the first special symbol game. It may have sex.

FIG. 7B shows an example of the specifications of a normal symbol game. In the normal symbol game, there are cases of a normal game state (non-time saving state), a first time saving game state, and a second time saving game state.

In the normal game state, the winning probability is set to 0 and the number of holdings is set to 4. In the first time-saving game, the winning probability is set to 251/251 and the number of holdings is set to 4. The number of time reductions is 100 times, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory is set to the first pattern group. In the second time-saving game, the winning probability is set to 251/251 and the number of holdings is set to 4. The number of time reductions is 100 times, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a is set in the second pattern group. The details of the first and second pattern groups will be described later, but are the drive patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the distribution device 506.

FIG. 7C shows an example of jackpot distribution. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit by a special symbol game and a V big hit, the big hit is divided into 15 rounds normal big hit, 15 rounds time saving 1 big hit, and 15 rounds time saving 2 big hits. Here, the 15-round normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and the time is not shortened after the jackpot game state ends. The 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and the game shifts to the 1st time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The 15-round time-saving 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot of the first special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 0, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 2 jackpot is 50. / 100.

In the jackpot of the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 15/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 2 jackpot. Is 65/100. Specifically, in the jackpot of the second special symbol game, there are 100 types of special symbols (big hit symbols) that are jackpots, and in these jackpot symbols, 20 types of jackpot symbols are 15 rounds of normal jackpots, and 15 types of jackpots. The symbols are distributed to 15 rounds of 1 jackpot, and 65 types of jackpot symbols are distributed to 15 rounds of 2 jackpots.

In the V big hit via the small hit of the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the normal game state is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to the first time saving game state is 15/100, and the second time saving. The probability of being distributed to the game state is 65/100. Specifically, in the V big hit via the small hit of the second special symbol game, it is determined by the special symbol (small hit symbol) which is the small hit. There are 100 types of small hit symbols, and among these small hit symbols, 20 types of small hit symbols are in the normal gaming state, 15 types of small hit symbols are in the first time-saving game state, and 65 types of small hit symbols are in the second. It is distributed to the time-saving game state.

In this way, the distribution of the game state after the end of the big hit game state by the big hit of the second special symbol game and the distribution of the game state after the end of the V big hit game state via the small hit of the second special symbol game are the same. , The big hit and the V big hit triggered by the second special symbol game shift to the normal game state, the first time-shortened game state, or the second time-shortened game state with the same probability after the big hit game ends.

Such distribution is performed after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state) in which the transfer is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second start area (second start port 414c). ), And the probability of becoming the normal state (normal game state) after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the V jackpot game state) executed with the passage of the special winning area (passing the V winning opening 424) is determined. From the probability of becoming a normal state (normal game state) after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state) in which the transition is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first start area. After the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state), which is small and the transition is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second start area (second start port 414c), and the special The probability of becoming the first specific state (first time-saving game state) after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state) executed with the passing of the winning area (passing the V winning opening 424) is the first start. After the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state) in which the transition is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) triggered by the passage of the game medium in the area (first start port 414b), the first specific state (first time reduction) This is an example of being greater than the probability of becoming a game state).

FIG. 7D shows an example of distribution of open patterns belonging to the first pattern group. An open pattern A is associated with the random value of the normal symbol 1 to which the random value in the range in which the selectivity is 50/100 in the normal symbol (for example, 0 to 49 in 0 to 99) belongs, and the normal symbol has an open pattern A. An open pattern B is associated with the random value of the normal symbol 2 to which another random value in the range of 50/100 (for example, 50 to 99 in 0 to 99) belongs.

FIG. 7E shows an example of distribution of open patterns belonging to the second pattern group. An open pattern C is associated with the random value of the normal symbol 1 to which the random value in the range in which the selectivity is 80/100 in the normal symbol (for example, 0 to 79 in 0 to 99) belongs, and the normal symbol has an open pattern C. An open pattern D is associated with the random value of the normal symbol 2 to which another random value in the range of 20/100 (for example, 80 to 99 in 0 to 99) belongs.

[Explanation of open pattern]
Next, the opening patterns A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.
As described above, the open patterns A to D are composed of a combination of the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the drive pattern of the distribution device 506. Further, in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 415a is in a closed state, and the distribution device 506 is in a state of distributing the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b side.

According to the opening pattern A, as shown in FIG. 8, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is a flat plate member 520 at the timing when the ordinary symbol game is hit, or after the predetermined hit start interval time is exhausted after the hit. The protrusion and pull-in of are repeated twice in succession. The time T1 at which the flat plate member 520 protrudes is set to the time required for the game ball located in the ball passage detector 416 to ride on the flat plate member 520 when the flat plate member 520 protrudes. After the flat plate member 520 protrudes and is retracted twice, the flat plate member 520 is in the retracted state until the next normal symbol game is hit.

The distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c side at the timing when the normal symbol game hits, that is, at the same timing as the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and immediately switches to the first non-electric accessory 415c side. Switch to the object 415b side. Since this switching operation is performed within the time T2 until the game ball on the flat plate member 520 reaches the distribution plate 507, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. It is rarely done. Then, the distribution device 506 switches to the second non-electric accessory 415c side when the predetermined time T3 has elapsed. The predetermined time T3 is set to a time required for the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a to protrude and retract three times from the time when the ordinary symbol game is hit. The distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b side when a predetermined time T4 has elapsed after switching the path to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. The predetermined time T4 is set to such a time that the three game balls are distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side.

According to the opening pattern B, as shown in FIG. 8, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is a flat plate member at the timing when the ordinary symbol game is hit, or after the predetermined hit start interval time is digested after the hit. The protrusion and pull-in of 520 are repeated three times in succession. The time T1 at which the flat plate member 520 protrudes is the same as the opening pattern A. The distribution device 506 switches to the first non-electric accessory 415b side or the second non-electric accessory 415c side in the same pattern as the opening pattern A.

As described above, in the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B belonging to the first opening pattern group, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is driven within the time when the distribution device 506 distributes the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b. Therefore, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is easily guided by the first non-electric accessory 415b. Here, in the opening pattern B, the flat plate member 520 is retracted because the distribution device 506 switches to the second non-electric accessory 415c side after a time T2 has elapsed since the operation of the normal electric accessory 415a is completed. The time from switching to the distribution plate 507 is short. Therefore, in rare cases, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 just before the flat plate member 520 protruding for the third time is distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side.

According to the opening pattern C, as shown in FIG. 9, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is a flat plate member 520 at the timing when the ordinary symbol game is hit, or after the predetermined hit start interval time is digested after the hit. Executes protrusion and pull-in once. The time T2'for the flat plate member 520 to protrude is set to a time during which the game ball located in the ball passage detector 416 does not reach the flat plate member 520 when the flat plate member 520 protrudes. That is, the game ball located in the ball passage detector 416 does not fall and ride on the flat plate member 520. After that, in the ordinary electric accessory 415a, the flat plate member 520 is projected at the timing when the distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c side, and the flat plate member 520 is switched to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. The flat plate member 520 is pulled in. That is, the flat plate member 520 is in a protruding state at the time T4 when the distribution device 506 distributes the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. The flat plate member 520 is in the retracted state until the next normal symbol game is hit.

According to the opening pattern D, as shown in FIG. 9, the driving pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a at the time T4 in which the flat plate member 520 is in the protruding state in the opening pattern C is a pattern in which the flat plate member 520 is projected three times. It was. The time for projecting the flat plate member 520 is set to the time T1 as in the opening / closing pattern A. Other operations are the same as the opening pattern C.

As described above, in the opening pattern C and the opening pattern D belonging to the second opening pattern group, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is in the time T4 during which the distribution device 506 distributes the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c. Since it is driven, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is easily guided by the second non-electric accessory 415c. Here, in the open pattern D, since the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 415a at the time T4 is intermittent, the game ball often does not ride on the flat plate member 520 as compared with the open pattern C.

According to the specifications of the present embodiment described above, in the first special symbol game, the small hit probability is 0/300 and the small hit is not obtained, so that the V prize is not won. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and as described above, the specifications may be such that the first special symbol game also shifts to a small hit. However, in order to make the second special symbol game more advantageous than the first special symbol game, it is desirable that the probability is smaller than the small hit probability (299/100) in the second special symbol game.
Further, in the big hit game by the big hit or the V big hit via the first special symbol game, the attacker 421 may be opened and closed instead of the shutter 417 in a predetermined round. Further, in the case of the V big hit via the small hit of the first special symbol game, the attacker 421 may be opened for all 15 rounds instead of the shutter 417 during the V big hit game. As described above, the attacker 421 is an example of the fifth displacement member.

[Electrical configuration of game machines]
A block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 that controls the game and a sub-control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), and a main RAM 103 (read / write memory).

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101, and have a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, for example, a program for causing the main CPU 101 to execute the processes shown in FIGS. 11 to 37, various tables, and the like. There is.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

Further, the main control circuit 100 commands commands to the reset clock pulse generation circuit 104 that generates a clock pulse of a predetermined frequency, the initial reset circuit 105 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and the sub control circuit 200 described later. The serial communication IC 106 for supplying the above is provided. Further, these reset clock pulse generation circuit 104, initial reset circuit 105, and serial communication IC 106 are connected to the main CPU 101.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 104 generates a clock pulse at predetermined cycles (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute the system timer interrupt process described later.

The initial reset circuit 105 includes a capacitor and a watchdog timer, and when the voltage applied to the capacitor reaches a certain value, a reset signal is transmitted to the main CPU 101. Further, the initial reset circuit 105 discharges to release the voltage applied to the capacitor by receiving a predetermined control signal from the main CPU 101.

The serial communication IC 106 is connected to the main CPU 101, the sub control circuit 200, and the payout / launch control circuit 300, and includes a buffer for the sub control board and a buffer for the payout / launch control circuit.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 100. For example, various devices that respond to signals from the main control circuit 100 include a special symbol display device 431 that variably displays a special symbol in a special symbol game, a round number display device 432 that displays the number of rounds in a round game, and a special symbol. A special symbol hold display device 433 that displays the number of holdings of the variable display of the special symbol in the game, a normal symbol display device 434 that performs a variable display of the normal symbol as an identification symbol in the normal symbol game, and a variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. The normal symbol hold display device 435 that displays the number of hold items, the normal electric accessory solenoid 111 that keeps the flat plate member 520 (see FIG. 5) of the normal electric accessory 415a open or closed, and the shutter 417 (see FIG. 4). ) Is driven to drive the large winning opening solenoid 112 and the movable member 426 (see FIG. 4) to open or close the large winning opening 418, and the V winning opening 424 is opened or closed. The solenoid 117 and the attacker 421 (see FIG. 4) are driven to drive the open / close winning opening solenoid 118 and the sorting device 506 (see FIG. 5) to open or close the opening / closing winning opening 420. A distribution solenoid 121 or the like for switching the passage path of the game ball is connected to either the first passage 504 or the second passage 505. In addition, a calling device (not shown) that has a function to call a hall clerk and a function to display the number of hits, and an external terminal board used for data transmission to a hall computer that manages pachinko game machines in the entire game hall (hall) are connected. Has been done.

Further, various sensors are connected to the main control circuit 100. For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a large winning opening count sensor 113 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 418, and games in the general winning openings 419a to 419c. When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning ball sensors 114a to 114c and the ball passage detector 416 that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when the ball wins, the predetermined detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 100. When a game ball wins a prize in the ball passage detection sensor 115 and the central start port 414a supplied to the main control circuit 100, a game ball is supplied to the central start port winning ball sensor 116a and the first start port 414b to supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b and the second starting port 414c that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when the player wins a prize, the predetermined detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 100. The opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a game ball wins a prize in the opening / closing winning opening 420, the opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120, and the ordinary electric accessory 415a. When the flat plate member 520 detects the captured game ball, the normal electric accessory ball entry sensor 122 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100, and the backup data at the time of power failure, etc. are operated by the game field administrator. A backup clear switch 123 or the like that clears according to the above is connected. In the present embodiment, winning means that the game ball passes through the area where each of the above sensors is provided.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. A payout device 71 for paying out a game ball, a launcher 20 for firing a game ball, and a card unit 400 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. The card unit 400 can be transmitted and received to and from the lending operation unit 401 that outputs a signal requesting the card unit 400 to lend the game ball by the operation of the player.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 400, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 71. Have the payout device 71 pay out the game ball. Further, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle when the launch handle 21 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the game is played. Controls the firing of the ball.

Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 50, control on sound generated from the speaker 14, control of lamps including decorative lamps, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. ..

In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, and a signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. Not limited to this, it may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, an RTC 204, a display control circuit 210 for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 50, a voice control circuit 220 for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 14, and a decorative lamp. It is composed of a lamp control circuit 230 that controls the lamp 15 including the above, an effect button 16, and an operation means control circuit 240 that receives an operation signal based on the operation of the player from the touch sensor 450. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program and various tables for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium readable by a computer provided with the control means is used. If there is, it may be in another mode, and may be recorded on a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge. Further, these programs may not be recorded in advance, but may be those that are downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, each of the programs may be recorded on a separate storage medium.

The work RAM 203 stores the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used. RTC204 keeps the current time.

The display control circuit 210 is a circuit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 50, and is an image data processor (hereinafter, referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, and an image data ROM. It is composed of a frame buffer that buffers image data, a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 210 is a device capable of performing various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 50 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 210 displays various image data such as identification symbol image data, background image data, and effect image data indicating the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device 50 in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be used is temporarily stored in the frame buffer.

Then, the display control circuit 210 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 50 at a predetermined timing, so that the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. That is, the display control circuit 210 controls the liquid crystal display device 50 to display an image related to the game.

Further, the voice control circuit 220 is composed of a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

This sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 14. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the voice signal and generates the voice from the speaker 14.

The lamp control circuit 230 is composed of a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The operation means control circuit 240 transmits the operation signal received from the effect button 16 to the sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 supplies the display control circuit 210 and the like with data for performing an effect according to the operation signal.

[Explanation of operation of main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 37.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main process controlled by the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 and 12 are flowcharts showing an example of the main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine.

In step S11, the watchdog timer disable setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of disabling the watchdog timer. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S12.

In step S12, the input / output port setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input / output port setting process. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S13.

In step S13, a process of determining whether or not the power failure is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HI (high level). If the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state, and the process is moved to step S13. If the power failure detection signal is not HI, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state, and step S14 The process is transferred, and if the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, the process is transferred to step S13 again, and this is repeated until it is determined that the power failure detection signal is not in the power failure detection state.

In step S14, the sub-control reception reception wait processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S15.

In step S15, the RAM write permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S16.

In step S16, a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 123 (see FIG. 10) is on is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear switch 123 (see FIG. 10) is on, the process is transferred to step S24, and if it is determined that the backup clear switch 123 is not on, the step The process is transferred to S17.

In step S17, a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to step S18, and if it is not determined that there is a power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S18, a process of calculating the work damage check value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S19.

In step S19, a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S20 when it determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, and proceeds to step S24 when it does not determine that the work damage check value is a normal value. Move the process.

In step S20, a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S21.

In step S21, the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S22.

In step S22, a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S23.

In step S23, the initial setting process of the CPU peripheral device is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 101. When this process is completed, the address is restored to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

In step S24, a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S25.

In step S25, a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S26.

In step S26, the entire work area clearing process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the entire work area. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S27 (see FIG. 12).

In step S27, a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S28.

In step S28, the work area initial setting process at the time of RAM initialization is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 initially sets the work area at the time of initializing the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S29.

In step S29, a process of transmitting a command at the time of RAM initialization is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 103 to the sub-control circuit 200. Further, in the sub-control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S30.

In step S30, the initial setting process of the CPU peripheral device is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 101. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S31.

In step S31, interrupt prohibition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S32.

In step S32, the initial value random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S33.

In step S33, the interrupt permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S34.

In step S34, the effect random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S35.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 103, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, shifts the process to step S36 and sets the system timer monitoring timer value. If it is not 3 or more, the process is moved to step S31.

In step S36, a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S37.

In step S37, the timer update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 measures the opening time of the large winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4) by driving the shutter 417, which is a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200. Opening and closing winning device opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the opening and closing winning opening 420 (see FIG. 4) by driving the attacker 421, V winning by driving the movable member 426 A process of updating various timers, such as a V winning opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the mouth 424, is executed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S38.

In step S38, a special symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 101 is used for hit determination according to the detection signals from the central start opening winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c. The random value and the random value for determining the winning symbol are extracted, the winning determination table stored in the main ROM 102 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) is won, and the judgment result is the main. The process of storing in the RAM 103 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S39.

In step S39, the normal symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value according to the detection signal from the ball passage detection sensor 115, refers to the normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 102, and draws a normal symbol. Is determined, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 103. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the specifications shown in FIG. 7, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state (non-time saving game state) is 0%, and the normal symbol lottery is won in the time saving game state. The probability of doing so is 100%. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory 415a operates only in the time-saving gaming state.

When the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a protrudes, and the game ball rides on the flat plate member 520, so that the blade member of the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c Is opened, and the game ball can easily enter the first starting port 414b or the second starting port 414c (see FIG. 4). When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S40.

In step S40, the symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol display device 431 and a normal symbol display device 434 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S38 and S39 and the result of the normal symbol control process. A process of storing a control signal for driving and is stored in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits this control signal to the special symbol display device 431 or the ordinary symbol display device 434. The special symbol display device 431 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. The ordinary symbol display device 434 displays a variable display and a stop display of the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S41.

In step S41, the sorting device control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 101 sends a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 121 based on a preset distribution pattern in synchronization with the drive start timing of the ordinary electric accessory 415a. Performs the process of storing in. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S39.

In step S42, the non-electric accessory management process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 101 includes the normal electric accessory entry sensor 122, the first photo sensor 508, and the first start after winning the normal symbol game in the normal symbol control process in step S39. Based on the detection results of the mouth winning ball sensor 116b, the second photo sensor 509, and the second starting mouth winning ball sensor 116c, a process of monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred is performed. Then, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing a control signal for notifying the error in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S43.

In step S43, the game information data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating data related to a game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer and storing it in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S44.

In step S44, the symbol reserved number data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a central start port winning ball sensor 116a, a first starting port winning ball sensor 116b, and a second start detected in a switch input process (step S305 in FIG. 34) in the timer interrupt process described later. Special based on the detection signals from the winning ball sensor 116c and the ball passage detection sensor 115, and the update result of the reserved number data stored in the main RAM 103, which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for displaying the hold of the symbol and the normal symbol in the main RAM 103 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S45.

In step S45, port output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 103 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the solenoid power supply for driving the LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED and the normal electric accessory solenoid 111 (see FIG. 5) for projecting and retracting the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a. , A solenoid power supply for driving the open / close winning opening solenoid 118 (see FIG. 5) that drives the attacker 421 of the opening / closing winning opening 420, and a V winning opening solenoid 117 (see FIG. 5) that drives the movable member 426 of the V winning opening 424. Supply solenoid power to drive. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S46.

In step S46, command control processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving game state flag is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and if it determines that the time-saving game state flag is set, generates a time-saving game state flag command and subordinates it. The process of transmitting to the control circuit 200 is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 supplies various commands to the sub control circuit 200. Examples of these various commands include a demo display command derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50, a derived symbol specification command described later, a variation pattern specification command described later, a big hit start command described later, and a small hit start command described later. The starting port winning command, which will be described later, is included. In this process, the main CPU 101 supplies the sub-control circuit 200 with data indicating the value of the time-saving state fluctuation counter, which will be described later, in addition to various commands. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S47.

In step S47, the payout process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the general winning openings 419a to 419c, the central starting opening 414a, the first starting opening 414b, the second starting opening 414c, the large winning opening 418, and the opening / closing winning opening 420. If there is a prize, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in step S38 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 13, the numerical values (00H to 10H) described in the vicinity of steps S62 to S72 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area functioning as the control state flags in the main RAM 103. Has been done. The main CPU 101 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, and the special symbol game progresses.

First, in step S61, a process of loading the control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S62.

In steps S62 to S72, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S62 to S72 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 101 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the process in each step is terminated without being executed, and other subroutines are executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S62, the special symbol memory check process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved special symbols when the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S63.

In step S63, the special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the predetermined variation time has elapsed in the previous special symbol variation. (When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops fluctuating), the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set in the control state flag, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S64 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S64.

In step S64, the special symbol display time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 hits (big hit) when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after confirmation. Or it is a small hit). When it is a small hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of step S65 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed.

Further, in the case of a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the big hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of step S68 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S72.

In step S65, the small hit start interval management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed, , The data for opening the opening / closing winning opening 420 read from the main ROM 102 is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, in the process of step S45 of FIG. 12, the main CPU 101 reads the data for releasing the attacker 421 (see FIG. 4) stored in the main RAM 103, and signals that the attacker 421 (see FIG. 4) is released. Is supplied to the opening / closing winning opening solenoid 118. In this way, the main CPU 101 and the like control the opening and closing of the attacker 421. That is, the "small hit game" is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the value (04H) indicating the small hit in the control state flag, and sets the open upper limit time of the attacker 421 in the attacker open time timer. In addition, it is set to execute the process of step S66. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S66.

In step S66, the small hit medium process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the large winning opening opening process (07H) or the small hit end post-processing (05H) in the control state flag depending on the conditions. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S67.

In step S67, the post-processing after the end of the small hit is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, after the attacker 421 is closed, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 424 in the V winning device 422. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S68.

In step S68, the jackpot start interval management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 is main when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed. The data for opening the large winning opening 418 read from the ROM 102 is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the main CPU 101 reads out the data for opening the large winning opening 418 stored in the main RAM 103, and supplies a signal to operate the shutter 417 to open the large winning opening 418 to the large winning opening solenoid 112. To do. In this way, the main CPU 101 and the like control the opening and closing of the shutter 417. That is, the "big hit game" is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the process of step S69 is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S69.

In step S69, the large winning opening opening process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 has a large prize opening winning counter of "10" or more when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating that the large winning opening is open. It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the opening upper limit time has passed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 418. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. When the main CPU 101 is the final round, the main CPU 101 sets a value (09H) indicating a hit end interval in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S71. On the other hand, when it is not the final round, a value (08H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening is set in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S70.

In step S70, the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (08H) indicating the management of the waiting time for reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter is set to ". Update the memory so that it increases by 1 ”. The main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the process of step S69 is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S69.

In step S71, the jackpot end interval process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 has a value (09H) indicating the hit end interval of the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval elapses, the special symbol game A value (10H) indicating the end is set in the control state flag. That is, the process of step S72 is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S72.

In step S72, the special symbol game end process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. .. That is, the process of step S62 is set to be executed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “10H”, so that the step shown in FIG. The processes of S62, step S63, step S64, and step S72 are executed at predetermined timings.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", and "06H" when the hit determination result is a big hit in the case where it is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state. As a result, the processes of step S62, step S63, step S64, and step S68 shown in FIG. 13 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the jackpot gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07H" and "08H" to process the steps S69 and S70 shown in FIG. Is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game is executed. When the end condition of the big hit game is satisfied, the processing of steps S69, S71, and S72 shown in FIG. 13 is performed at a predetermined timing by setting "07H", "09H", and "10H" in this order. Will be executed and the jackpot game will end.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", and "03H" when the result of the hit determination is a small hit in the case where the game is not in the big hit or small hit game state. By doing so, the processes of step S62, step S63, step S64, and step S65 shown in FIG. 13 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S66 shown in FIG. 13 at a predetermined timing by setting the control state flag to “04H”. , The jackpot game will be executed. When the end condition of the small hit game is satisfied, the processes of steps S67 and S72 shown in FIG. 13 are executed at predetermined timings by setting "05H" and "10H" in this order, and the small hit is performed. The game will end.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
The subroutine (special symbol memory check process) executed in step S62 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 14, in step S71, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S72. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 does not determine that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S72, a process of determining the presence / absence of special drawing 1 start memory is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores data in the presence / absence of start memory of the first special symbol game by winning a prize in the central start port 414a or the first start port 414b, that is, in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judge whether or not. When the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S73. If it is determined that there is a memory for starting the first special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S77.

In step S73, a process of determining the presence / absence of special drawing 2 start memory is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start memory of the second special symbol game due to the winning of the second start port 414c is present, that is, whether or not the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). To do. If the main CPU 101 determines that there is no memory for starting the second special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S74. If it is determined that there is a memory for starting the second special symbol game, the process is moved to step S75.

Here, data such as a big hit determination random value and a big hit symbol determination random value corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol game are stored as start storage in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. The information of the four special symbol games held is stored as start storage in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Further, data such as a big hit determination random value and a big hit symbol determination random value corresponding to the changing second special symbol game are stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. In the second special symbol game, there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). ) Is not stored, and is executed when the second starting port 414c is won. Therefore, it is possible to hold up to 4 times.

In step S74, a demo display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 (the state in which the hit determination random value is not stored in the first special symbol start storage area and the second special symbol start storage area) is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the demo display command data when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command data stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. As a result, in the sub-control circuit 200, the demo display is controlled to be displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S76.

In step S76, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S80.

In step S77, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S78.

In step S78, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S79.

In step S79, the special symbol storage transfer process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 inputs each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol. The process of shifting (storing) to the start storage area (3) is executed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S80.

In step S80, the hit determination process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 102, is extracted at the time of starting winning, and is set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). The hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area and the hit determination table are referred to. Then, when the hit determination random value and the hit determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit is a big hit or a small hit. If it is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", it is judged to be a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to set the "big hit game state" and whether or not to set the "small hit game state". The determination of whether or not it is a small hit includes a lottery probability of 0. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S81.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case of a loss, that is, in the case of a loss, a process of determining the loss symbol is performed. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S82.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 creates a variation pattern determination table for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S81 and the result of the hit determination determined in the process of step S80. select. Then, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 431 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 431. As a result, the special symbol display device 431 will variablely display the special symbol in the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol effect start command by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S83.

In step S83, the special symbol fluctuation time setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S84.

In step S84, a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103 is performed. The special symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. The special symbol production start command includes data related to the game state, fluctuation pattern, special symbol, remaining time reduction number, and the like. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S85.

Then, in step S85, the main CPU 101 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) executed in step S81 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S91, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the hit determination (step S80). If it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is moved to step S92. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the process is moved to step S97.

In step S92, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation state number is (01H). If it is determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S93. If it is not determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S95.

In step S93, a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol game based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S94.

In step S94, the data set of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol game and the command set of the jackpot symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol game. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it to the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. As a result, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol for the effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S95, a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol game is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol game based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S96.

In step S96, the data set of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol game and the command set of the jackpot symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol game. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it to the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. As a result, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol for the effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S97, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit is a small hit as a result of the hit determination (step S80), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S98. If it is not determined to be a small hit, the process is moved to step S100.

In step S98, a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol game is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol game according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S99. In this embodiment, only the second special symbol wins the "small hit".

In step S99, the data set of the small hit symbol and the command set of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol game are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command for the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol for the effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S100, the data set of the lost symbol and the command set of the lost symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 fluctuates the special symbol and stops the display in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol for the effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, since the small hit probability in the first special symbol game is 0, the determination of the small hit symbol in the first special symbol game and the data of the small hit symbol can be obtained. The process of setting commands has not been performed. However, in the case of the specification having a small hit in the first special symbol game, it is preferable to add the process corresponding to steps S92 to S94 executed in the case of the big hit after step S97.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol fluctuation time management process) executed in step S63 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management. If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S102, and if it is not determined that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0", and if it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0", the process shifts to step S103. If it is not determined that the waiting time timer is "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S103, a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S104.

In step S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Then, the symbol stop command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S105.

In step S105, after confirmation, a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. The waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in step S64 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process shifts to step S112. If it is not determined that the control status flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S112, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. Is determined. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S113. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process is moved to step S119. If it is not a big hit, the process is moved to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. If it is a small hit, the process is moved to step S115. If it is not a small hit, the process is moved to step S124.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the small hit in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. This special symbol effect stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit or the small hit start. .. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off (clearing) the time saving game state flag of the main RAM 103. In the "big hit game state", the "time saving game" is not performed. On the other hand, the counter for the number of consecutive time reductions is not cleared. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. This special symbol effect stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S123.

In step S123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the jackpot start command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the jackpot start. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process in a predetermined area that becomes a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S125.

In step S125, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. This special symbol effect stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (small hit start interval management process) executed in step S65 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S131, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process shifts to step S132. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management process is “0”, that is, whether or not the small hit start interval time has been exhausted. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S133. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the upper limit value of the opening / closing winning opening opening number counter regarding the opening number of the attacker 421 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the opening / closing winning opening opening count counter. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S135. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit value of the open / close winning opening opening count counter set in the process of step S133 is limited to "1", the processes of steps S134 and S135 can be omitted.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the open / close winning opening opening display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 with respect to the attacker 421. The opening / closing winning opening opening display command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as an opening / closing winning opening opening display command under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S137.

In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the small hit middle process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the open / close winning opening winning counter regarding the number of winnings of the attacker 421. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S139.

In step S139, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 with respect to the opening time of the attacker 421. The waiting time may be, for example, 1200 ms or 1500 ms. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S140.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 relates to the operation of the movable member 426 of the V winning opening 424, and the movable member operating flag (hereinafter, referred to as a moving flag) indicating whether or not the movable member 426 is operated and is in the open state. ) Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit processing]
The subroutine (small hit middle processing) executed in step S66 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S141, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a small hit medium process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit medium processing, the processing is shifted to step S142. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit middle processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S142, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing winning opening counter is 1 or more for the attacker 421. When the open / close winning opening counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S148. If the opening / closing winning opening counter is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit middle processing is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer becomes 0 and the opening time of the attacker 421 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S148, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit medium process. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S149.

In step S149, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S150. If there is no V winning flag, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 sets the large winning opening opening process (07H) to the control state flag. That is, in step S149, when the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is present, the preparation for the "big hit game" starting from the "V big hit" is started. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S151.

In step S151, a process of setting the large winning opening opening number counter to “2” is performed. In this process, the "V jackpot game" started from the "V jackpot" is the first round of opening the attacker 421 that is entered into the V winning slot 424, and the subsequent "big hit game" is the jackpot 418. This is a process that occurs when the opening of is the second round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S152.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as a start interval time per V. The time may be the same as the interval between rounds, for example, 5000 ms. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off the V winning flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S154.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a start command per V in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S156.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit. This time may be, for example, 5000 ms. This process is necessary for confirming that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 424 after the attacker 421 is closed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the opening / closing winning opening opening count counter set in the process of step S133 is "1", but if it is larger than "1", instead of step S143 shown in FIG. Although not shown, the processing of steps S143 to S147 described below may be added.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit middle processing is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer becomes 0 and the opening time or closing time of the attacker 421 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S144. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process is moved to step S147.

In step S144, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening / closing winning opening opening count counter is equal to or greater than the opening / closing winning opening opening count upper limit value set in step S133. When the opening / closing winning opening opening counter is equal to or greater than the opening / closing winning opening opening count upper limit value, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S148. If the opening / closing winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the opening / closing winning opening opening count upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S145.

In step S145, if this time is closed, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the opening / closing winning opening opening count counter. That is, when the opening / closing winning opening opening counter is not equal to or more than the large winning opening opening count upper limit value, the "small hit game state" is continued, the closed attacker 421 is later opened, and the opening / closing winning opening is opened again. In order to determine the number of times the attacker 421 of the number of times counter has been opened, 1 is added to the number of times the large winning opening opening number counter is opened. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S146.

In step S146, the main CPU 101 sets the next open / close mode data and open / close timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S147.

In step S147, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag related to winning the V winning opening 424. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S150. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is terminated.

[Post-processing after small hit]
The subroutine (processing after the end of the small hit) executed in step S67 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing is shifted to step S162. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the timer for the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the residual monitoring time at the end of the small hit has been exhausted. When the value of the timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S164. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process is moved to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. The determination of whether or not there is a V winning flag is performed at this timing, and even if a fraudulent act such as intentionally setting the V winning flag is performed at a timing other than these, the determination of the V winning flag is performed. Not done. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S150 in FIG. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S165.

In step S165, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Big hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management process) executed in step S68 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the jackpot start interval management process, as shown in FIG. 21, in step S171, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, the process shifts to step S172. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S172, when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the jackpot start interval management process is “0”. judge. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S173, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S173, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter for the large winning opening 418 of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, since all the "big hit games" by the special symbol are 15 round big hits, the upper limit value of the big winning opening opening counter is set to "15". When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S174.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S176.

In step S176, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S177.

In step S177, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a large winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S178.

In step S178, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S179.

In step S179, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Large winning opening opening process]
The subroutine (large winning opening opening process) executed in step S69 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the large winning opening opening process, in step S181, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process shifts to step S182. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S182, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning counter is “10” or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S185 and does not determine that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. If so, the process is transferred to step S183.

In step S183, the large winning opening opening / closing process is performed according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round. In this process, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 417 to open and close the large winning opening 418. Specifically, a process of closing and opening the large winning opening 418 after waiting for a time is performed according to the opening / closing pattern for each round. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S184.

In step S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the large winning opening opening time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer of the predetermined area functioning as the large winning opening opening time timer in the main RAM 103 is "0", the process is transferred to step S185, and the waiting time timer is "0". If it is not determined that there is, this subroutine is terminated. That is, when it is determined that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, or when the large winning opening opening time timer is determined to be "0", the process is moved to step S185 and the large winning opening winning is won. This subroutine is terminated when it is not determined that the counter is "10" or more and the large winning opening opening time timer is not determined to be "0".

In step S185, a process of clearing the large winning opening opening time timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing a predetermined area that functions as a large winning opening opening time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S186.

In step S186, a process of setting the large winning opening closing data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 418. The variable stored in this way drives the large winning opening solenoid 112 by the process of step S45 in FIG. 12, and closes the shutter 417. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S187.

In step S187, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 103 with the large winning opening opening number upper limit value (for example, 15 times) or more, and the large winning opening opening number counter is large. It is determined whether or not the winning opening opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit. If it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is open is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process is moved to step S191, and if it is not determined that the number is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of opening of the large winning opening, the process is moved to step S188.

In step S188, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 as the interval time between rounds and the remaining ball monitoring time. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S189.

In step S189, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S190.

In step S190, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the inter-round display command data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S191, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as the jackpot end interval time and the remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S192.

In step S192, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S193.

In step S193, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the interval end display command data per special symbol in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
The subroutine (waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening) executed in step S70 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 23, in step S201, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. Performs the process of determining whether or not. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process shifts to step S202. If it is not determined that the control status flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S202, when the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the value of the waiting time timer as the interval time between rounds is “0”. Judge whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S203, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening is the data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The large winning opening opening display command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening display command. This large winning opening opening display command includes an instruction to perform the round counter +1 to the sub CPU 201. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a large winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S206, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S207.

In step S207, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a large winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval processing) executed in step S71 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S208, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, the processing shifts to step S209. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S209, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is “0”. judge. That is, it is determined whether the value of the waiting time timer is "0" after the jackpot end interval time is exhausted. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S210, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S210, the main CPU 101 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S214.

In step S214, it is determined whether or not there is a time reduction in the game after the jackpot game state ends. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game after the end of the big hit game state has a short time based on the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. If there is a time saving, the process is moved to step S215. If there is no time reduction, the process is moved to step S219.

In step S215, it is determined whether or not the game after the end of the big hit game state is the first time saving game. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game after the end of the big hit game state is the first time saving game based on the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. If it is the first time saving game, the process is moved to step S216. If it is not the first time saving game, the process is moved to step S217.

In step S216, the first time saving flag is set. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a value for turning on the first time saving flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S218.

In step S217, the second time saving flag is set. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a value for turning on the second time saving flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S218.

In step S218, the process of setting the number of time reductions is performed, and the process of setting the time reduction start flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the number of time reductions in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, and sets (stores) a value for turning on the time reduction start flag in the predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Perform the process of In this embodiment, "100" is set as the number of time reductions. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S219, the normal gaming state is set. The main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a normal game state in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state is set when the time saving flag, that is, the value for turning off both the first time saving flag and the second time saving flag is set in the predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Equivalent to. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of steps S208 to S219, that is, the jackpot end interval process executed in step S71, is an example of the game state control means. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of steps S214 to S219 is an example of the game state setting means.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in step S72 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S221, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to step S222. If it is not determined that the control state flag is not a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S222, it is determined whether or not there is a V winning flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a value for turning on the V winning flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 used as the V winning flag, and a value for turning on the V winning flag. If is set, the process moves to step S223. If the value for turning on the V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S225.

In step S223, the V winning flag is turned off. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning off the V winning flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 used as the V winning flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S224.

In step S224, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the time saving start flag is on. If the time saving start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S228. If the time saving start flag is not turned on, the process is moved to step S225.

In step S225, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S226.

In step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is the time reduction counter, that is, 100 or more. When the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the time reduction counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S227. If it is not determined that the count value of the time reduction counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S228. Further, in step S226, for example, if the time reduction counter determines that the count value of 100 is 100 or more and the V jackpot is not obtained during the 100 time reduction games, the process is moved to step S227 and the process is moved to step S227. Clear the time reduction counter.

In step S227, the time saving flag is turned off (cleared). When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S229.

In step S228, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off the time saving start flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S229.

In step S229, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Normal symbol control processing]
The subroutine (ordinary symbol control process) executed in step S39 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 26, the numerical values drawn on the sides of steps S230 to S235 indicate the normal symbol control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area functioning as the normal symbol control state flags in the main RAM 103. ing. The main CPU 101 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, and the normal symbol game progresses.

In step S230, a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S231.

In steps S231 to S235, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the normal symbol control state flag, as will be described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S231 to S235 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 101 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the process in each step is terminated without being executed, and other subroutines are executed.

In step S231, the normal symbol memory check process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this process, in this process, the normal control state flag is a value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, and the normal symbol hold storage number data which is data indicating the number of holds related to the normal symbol. When the value of is "1" or more, it is determined whether or not the hit determination random value matches the hit determination value (hit determination). When the hit judgment random value matches the hit judgment value, the value (77) indicating the hit is stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103 used as the hit flag, and the hit symbol is stored in the main RAM 103 as a predetermined value. Set in the storage area. When the hit determination random value matches the hit determination value, the lost symbol is set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103.

Here, different normal symbol winning tables are referred to in the first and second time-saving game states and the non-time-saving game state (normal game state). That is, in the first and second time-saving game states, the normal symbol winning table with a high probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (for example, 251/251) is referred to, and in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state), it is normal. A normal symbol winning table with a low probability of winning a symbol lottery (for example, 0/251) is referred to. In this way, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S231 is in the second state (closed state) of the third displacement member (flat plate member) when the game medium passes through the passing region (ball passage detector 416). This is an example of a drive determination means that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the 520) to the first state (open state).

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a normal symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The normal symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received normal symbol effect start command.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (01) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process in the normal control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S232.

In step S232, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 monitors the normal symbol display time when the normal control state flag is a value (01) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process and the value of the waiting time timer of the normal symbol is “0”. The value (02) indicating the process is set in the normal control state flag and set in the waiting time timer after confirmation. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S233.

In step S233, the normal symbol display time monitoring process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal control state flag is a value (02) indicating the normal symbol display time management process, and if it is determined that the flag is a hit, the waiting time after confirmation is determined. When the value of the set waiting time timer is "0", the opening time and the opening pattern are set, and the value (03) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process is set in the control state flag. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 101 is not a hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04) indicating the normal symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S234 or step S235.

In step S234, the normal electric accessory opening process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a normal symbol when the normal control state flag is a value (03) indicating the normal electric accessory release process and the value of the normal electric accessory release time timer is “0”. The value (04) indicating the end of the game is set in the normal control state flag. That is, the normal electric accessory 415a is in the open state until the value of the normal electric service opening time timer reaches "0", and when the value of the normal electric service open time timer reaches "0", the normal electric accessory 415a is in the closed state. It means that. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S235.

In step S235, when the normal control state flag is the value (04) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol hold storage number data and of the normal symbol start storage data. The storage area is shifted, clear data is set in the normal symbol start storage data area, and a value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check process is set in the normal control state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Normal symbol memory check processing]
The subroutine (ordinary symbol memory check process) executed in step S231 of FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

In the normal symbol storage check process, as shown in FIG. 27, in step S241, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal control state flag is a value (00) indicating the normal symbol memory check process. When the normal control state flag is a value (00) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S312, and the normal control state flag is a value (00) indicating the normal symbol memory check process. ), This subroutine is terminated.

In step S242, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold storage number data (hold number) stored in the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the value of the normal symbol hold storage number data (holding number) is not "0", the process shifts to step S243, and if the value of the normal symbol hold storage number data (holding number) is "0", the process proceeds to step S243. , The process is transferred to step S251.

In step S243, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not it is in the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that either the first time saving flag or the second time saving flag is on, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S244. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that neither the first time saving flag nor the second time saving flag is on, that is, when it is determined that the game is not in the time saving game state, the process shifts to step S245.

In step S244, a process of determining a normal symbol hit is performed with a high probability. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit determination table having a high winning probability, and the game ball passes through the hit determination value stored in the hit determination table and the ball passage detector 416 included in the start memory. It is determined whether or not the random value for determination per normal symbol extracted at the time matches. If they match, they win, and if they do not match, they lose. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S246.

In step S245, a process of determining a normal symbol hit is performed with a low probability. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit determination table having a low winning probability, and the game ball passes through the hit determination value stored in the hit determination table and the ball passage detector 416 included in the start memory. It is determined whether or not the random value for determination per normal symbol extracted at the time matches. If they match, they win, and if they do not match, they lose. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S246. In the big hit game state, since the time saving flag is turned off by the process of step S120 shown in FIG. 17, the normal symbol hit determination is performed with reference to the hit determination table having a low winning probability. According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, since the winning probability by the hit determination table having a low winning probability is “0”, the process of step S245 can be omitted.

In step S246, the opening pattern setting process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, that is, the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S247.

In step S247, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The normal symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. The normal symbol production start command includes data such as a game state, a fluctuation time, a normal symbol, and an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 415a. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received normal symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S248.

In step S248, the main CPU 101 sets a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) in the normal symbol waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S249.

In step S249, the main CPU 101 sets a value (01) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time management in the normal control state flag. When this process is completed, the step S250 process is transferred.

In step S250, the main CPU 101 clears the storage area used for this variation. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S251, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol demo display process. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Open pattern setting process]
The subroutine (open pattern setting process) executed in step S246 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

In step S261, a process of determining whether or not the game is in the second time saving game state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the second time saving gaming state depending on the presence or absence of the second time saving flag. If it is determined that the game is in the second short game state, the process is moved to step S262. If it is not determined that the game is in the second short game state, the process is moved to step S263.

In step S262, a process of determining an opening pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting an open pattern by a random number lottery from a group of open patterns in which a game ball can be easily guided to the second non-electric accessory 415c. Specifically, a process of selecting either the opening pattern C or the opening pattern D belonging to the second ordinary electric accessory opening pattern group shown in FIG. 7E is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S263, a process of determining an opening pattern that makes it easy to guide the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting an open pattern by a random number lottery from a group of open patterns in which a game ball can be easily guided to the first non-electric accessory 415b. Specifically, a process of selecting either the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B belonging to the first ordinary electric accessory opening pattern group shown in FIG. 7D is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Normal symbol display time monitoring process]
The subroutine (normal symbol display time monitoring process) executed in step S233 of FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

First, as shown in FIG. 29, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol control state flag is the value (02) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring (step S251), and the normal symbol waiting time timer is “0”. Whether or not it is determined (step S252). In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating normal symbol display time monitoring and the normal symbol waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 performs the process in step S253. Move. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 does not determine that the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol display time management, or when it does not determine that the normal symbol waiting time timer is "0". Terminates this subroutine.

In step S253, it is determined whether or not the hit flag is “77”. In this process, if the main CPU 101 does not determine that the hit flag is "77", the process shifts to step S254, and if it determines that the hit flag is "77", step S256 Move the process to.

In step S254, a process of setting a value (04) indicating the end of the normal symbol game as a normal symbol control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores a value indicating the end of the normal symbol game in the normal symbol control state flag. As a result, the normally electric accessory 415a is maintained in the closed state. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S256, the normal electric service open time timer set is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value indicating the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 415a in the ordinary electric accessory opening timer based on the opening / closing pattern set in step S246 (step S256). When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S257.

In step S257, a value (03) indicating that the normal electric service is open is set in the normal symbol control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores a value indicating that the normal electric service is open in the normal symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Distributor control process]
The subroutine (distribution device control process) executed in step S41 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S271, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (03) indicating the release of the normal electric accessory, the process shifts to step S272, and the main CPU 101 is not a value (03) indicating the release of the normal electric accessory. At the end of this subroutine.

In step S272, the main CPU 101 sets a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 121 in the main RAM 103 based on the distribution pattern stored in the main RAM 103. When this control signal is output from each port in step S45, solenoid power is supplied to the distribution solenoid 121 (see FIG. 10), and the distribution device 506 is driven. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. The sorting device control process may be executed, for example, in the ordinary electric accessory opening process in step S234.

[Non-electric accessory management process]
The subroutine (non-electric accessory management process) executed in step S42 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S275, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second time saving flag is on, and if it is determined that the second time saving flag is on, the process shifts to step S276. If it is not determined that the second time saving flag is on, the process proceeds to step S277.

In step S276, special figure 2 related sensor detection processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101 transmits an error signal based on the detection results of the ordinary electric accessory ball entry sensor 122, the second photo sensor 509, and the second start port winning ball sensor 116c. Performs the process of determining whether or not. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S277, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first time saving flag is on, and if it is determined that the first time saving flag is on, the process shifts to step S278. If it is not determined that the second time saving flag is on, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S278, the special figure 1 related sensor detection process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101 transmits an error signal based on the detection results of the ordinary electric accessory ball entry sensor 122, the first photo sensor 508, and the first start port winning ball sensor 116b. Performs the process of determining whether or not. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Related Sensor Detection Processing]
The subroutine (special figure 2 related sensor detection process) executed in step S276 of FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

In step S280 shown in FIG. 32, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol game is a hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the normal symbol game is a hit, that is, whether or not the hit flag (77) is stored in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that there is a hit in the normal symbol game, the process is moved to step S281. If it is not determined that the game is a hit of the normal symbol game, the process is moved to step S286.

In step S281, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the normal symbol game is a hit in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S282.

In step S282, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been released, that is, whether or not data instructing the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 415a is stored in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been opened, the process is shifted to step S283. If it is not determined that the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been opened, the process proceeds to step S284.

In step S283, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been released in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S284.

In step S284, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory ball entry sensor 122 is on. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the normal electric accessory entry sensor 122 is on, that is, whether or not a detection signal from the ordinary electric accessory entry sensor 122 is received. When it is determined that the normal electric accessory ball entry sensor 122 has detected the game ball, the process proceeds to step S285. If it is not determined that the normal electric accessory ball entry sensor 122 has detected the game ball, the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S285, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the normal electric accessory entry sensor 122 has detected the game ball in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S286.

In step S286, a process of determining whether or not the second photosensor 509 is on is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second photosensor 509 is on, that is, whether or not a game ball detection signal is received from the second photosensor 509. If it is determined that the second photosensor 509 is on, the process proceeds to step S287. If it is not determined that the second photosensor 509 is on, the process proceeds to step S289.

In step S287, a process of activating the timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 activates a timer that clocks a predetermined time. Here, the predetermined time is set to, for example, about 10 seconds. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S288.

In step S288, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the second photosensor 509 is on, in other words, the non-electric accessory 415c is in the open state, in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. .. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S289.

In step S289, a process of determining whether or not the second start opening winning ball sensor 116c is turned on is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start opening winning ball sensor 116c is turned on, that is, whether or not the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c has detected the game ball. If it is determined that the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c is on, the process proceeds to step S290. If it is not determined that the second start opening winning ball sensor 116c is on, the process proceeds to step S291.

In step S290, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the second start opening winning ball sensor 116c has detected the game ball in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S291.

In step S291 shown in FIG. 33, a process of determining whether or not the second photosensor 509 is off is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second photosensor 509 is off. If it is determined that the second photosensor 509 is off, the process proceeds to step S292. If it is not determined that the second photosensor 509 is off, the process proceeds to step S293.

In step S292, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the second photosensor 509 is off, in other words, the non-electric accessory 415c is in the closed state, in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. .. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S294.

In step S293, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer has become "0", and if it determines that the waiting time timer has become "0", the process shifts to step S294. If it is not determined that the timer has reached "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S294, an error determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of an error based on the predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, and if there is an error, stores a control signal for notifying the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 of the occurrence of the error. Perform the process of (setting). This control signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the hall computer of the amusement park, and the like by the process of step S45.

Specifically, in the predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, data indicating that the normal symbol game is a hit, data indicating that the normal electric accessory 415a has been released, and the ordinary electric accessory entry sensor 122 are used as a game ball. Data indicating that the non-electric accessory 415c is in the open state, data indicating that the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c has detected the game ball, and the non-electric accessory 415c are in the closed state. The data indicating that the data is stored in order is accumulated.

In the main CPU 101, the opening of the non-electric accessory 415c and the detection of the game ball of the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c hit the normal symbol game, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and the game of the ordinary electric accessory entry sensor 122. If it does not go through the order of ball detection, it is judged as an error. As a specific example, there is no data indicating that the normal symbol game is a hit, but there is data indicating that the normal electric accessory 415a has been released, or there is no data indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been released. However, if there is data that the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c has detected the game ball, it is determined as an error. In the former case, the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened even though the normal symbol game is not won, and there is a possibility that the second non-electric accessory 415c is forcibly opened. In the latter case, there is a possibility that the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c is operated by an illegal means. In this way, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the hall computer to notify the game hall staff when there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. Further, when the second non-electric accessory 415c is closed, if the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c does not detect the game ball, it is also determined as an error. In this case, it is conceivable that the game ball is clogged in the second non-electric accessory 415c. However, since there are usually cases where the normal symbol lottery is executed even if the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c is not won, the main CPU 101 is a normal electric accessory entry sensor. 122, in the case of hitting the normal symbol game, opening the normal electric accessory 415a, and detecting the game ball of the ordinary electric accessory entry sensor 122, no error is determined.

Further, when the non-electric accessory 415c is closed after the non-electric accessory 415c is opened, the main CPU 101 does not detect the game ball by the second start opening winning ball sensor 116c. Judge as an error. In this case, there is a possibility that the non-electric accessory 415c is intentionally returned from the open state to the closed state in order to prevent fraudulent activities from being revealed.

Further, the main CPU 101 determines that an error occurs when the non-electric accessory 415c is not returned to the closed state even if the timer becomes "0" after the non-electric accessory 415c is opened. In this case, the player is notified by the image display or voice output by the liquid crystal display device 50 that the second non-electric accessory 415c is in the open state, and the data prompting the launch (right-handed) of the game ball is transmitted. It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S295.

In step S295, the timer is reset. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the timer value to the initial value before the activation. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. The data cumulatively stored in the main RAM 103 is erased by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Special Figure 1 Related Sensor Detection Processing]
The subroutine (special figure 1 related sensor detection process) executed in step S278 of FIG. 31 will be described.

In the special figure 1 related sensor detection process, the same process as the special figure 2 related sensor detection process shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 is performed, and the normal symbol game is hit in the predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Data showing, data indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been opened, data indicating that the normal electric accessory entry sensor 122 has detected a game ball, data indicating that the non-electric accessory 415b is in the open state, Data indicating that the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b has detected a game ball and data indicating that the non-electric accessory 415b is in a closed state are accumulated and stored in order.

Then, the main CPU 101 makes an error determination based on these data stored in the main RAM 103, and when there is an error, stores (sets) a control signal for notifying the occurrence of the error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Perform the processing to be performed. This control signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the hall computer of the amusement park, and the like by the process of step S45.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The main CPU 101 may interrupt the main process and execute the system timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. The system timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 34.

In step S301, a process of saving each register is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area) of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S302.

In step S302, the timer is updated. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the random numbers stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S303.

In step S303, a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 105 (see FIG. 10). The initial reset circuit 105 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 105 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 105 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 105 to the main CPU 101 A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 105, the main CPU 101 enters the system reset state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S304.

In step S304, the random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 101 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination random number counter, a big hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for determining the jackpot and the random number counter for determining the jackpot symbol will be unfair. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 msec. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S305.

In step S305, the switch input process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 101 is provided in the large winning opening count sensor 113 provided in the large winning opening 418, the general winning ball sensors 114a to 114c provided in the general winning openings 419a to 419c, and the ball passage detector 416. The ball passage detection sensor 115, the central starting port winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting port winning ball provided in the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b, and the second starting port 414c. Each switch (sensor) receives a detection signal from the sensor 116c, the open / close winning opening count sensor 120 provided in the opening / closing winning opening 420, and the V winning ball sensor 119 provided in the V winning opening 424, so that each switch (sensor) plays a game ball. Is detected. When the main CPU 101 determines that it has been detected, the large prize opening prize ball counter, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the opening / closing winning opening prize ball counter, the starting opening prize ball counter, and the V prize ball counter are determined according to the detection. And so on. The details of the switch input process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S306.

In step S306, the movable member control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the movable member 426. The details of this control will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S307.

In step S307, register return processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input process of step S305 shown in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S311, the prize ball-related detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 includes a large winning opening count sensor 113, an opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120, general winning ball sensors 114a to 114c, a central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a, a first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, and a second start. It is determined whether or not there is an input from the mouth winning ball sensor 116c, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the input of the large winning opening count sensor 113 has been made, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter, and the general winning ball sensors 114a to 114c are input. If it is determined that the value has been increased, 1 is added to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter, and the input of the central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c is performed. If it is determined that there is, 1 is added to the value of the starting opening prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S312.

In step S312, a special symbol-related detection process is performed. The special symbol-related processing will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S313.

In step S313, the normal symbol-related detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input from the ball passage detection sensor 115, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the number of pending numbers is the upper limit (for example). It is determined whether or not the number is 4. If it is not determined to be the upper limit, the hit judgment random number value is extracted from the hit judgment random number counter of the normal symbol game, and the hit symbol determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the main RAM 103 Performs processing to store in the normal symbol storage area. If it is determined that the upper limit is reached, this subroutine is terminated. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S314.

In step S314, the V winning detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input of the V winning ball sensor 119, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the V winning ball flag is turned on. Perform the processing. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is on only when the small hit is made, and even if the V winning flag is turned on at other times, the special symbol game end process 00H (FIG. 15). See). When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S315.

In step S315, the abnormality-related detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred based on the detection result of the abnormality-related sensor. When an abnormality is detected, processing for notifying the abnormality is performed, and when no abnormality is detected, this subroutine is terminated as it is. Examples of the abnormality-related sensor include an ordinary electric accessory ball entry sensor 122, a first photo sensor 508, a second photo sensor 509, and an open / close switch for a glass door 10. The detection results of these sensors are output to the main CPU 101.

[Special symbol related detection processing]
The special symbol-related detection process of step S312 shown in FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

In step S320, a process of determining whether or not the game is in the special gaming state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in a special gaming state, that is, a jackpot gaming state, a V jackpot gaming state, or a small hit gaming state, and if it is determined to be in the special gaming state, step S326 is performed. The process is transferred, and if any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S321.

In step S321, a process of determining whether or not the special symbol is in the stop display state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has data such as a jackpot random value in each of the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). If it is not stored and all the conditions that the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is the stop display mode are satisfied, the process is moved to step S322, and any one of them is transferred. If the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S322, a process of determining whether or not the special figure 2 start winning prize is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input from the second start opening winning ball sensor 116c. If it is determined that the input of the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c has been input, the process is transferred to step S323, and if it is not determined that the input of the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c has been input, the process is performed in step S326. Move.

In step S323, various random value acquisition processes are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value for jackpot determination used in the second special symbol game from the random number counter for jackpot determination (so-called special symbol lottery, hereinafter referred to as special symbol 2 lottery), and further, a jackpot symbol. A process of extracting a random number value for determining a jackpot symbol from a random number counter for determination, extracting a random number value for determining an effect condition from a random number counter for determining an effect condition, and storing it in a second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. I do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S324. Since the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S320 and S321, the special figure 2 lottery is not executed in the special game state, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not reserved. Therefore, even if a prize is rarely given to the second starting port 414c in the special game state, the prize does not trigger the transition to the special game state.

In step S324, the winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 sets the second start opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The second start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub control circuit 200 has won the second starting opening and whether the winning lottery result is correct or not. Will be recognized. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S326, a process of determining whether or not the special figure 1 start winning prize is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input from the central start opening winning ball sensor 116a or the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b. If it is determined that there is an input from the central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a or the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, the process is transferred to step S327, and the process is moved to the central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a or the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b. If it is not determined that there was an input of, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S327, a process of determining whether or not the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start memory of the first special symbol, that is, the number of reserved symbols is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of held items is 4 or more, this subroutine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of items held is not 4 or more, the process is moved to step S328.

In step S328, a process of adding 1 to the start memory of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S329. As described above, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of steps S327 and S328 is an example of the hold control means.

In step S329, various random value acquisition processes are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value for jackpot determination used in the first special symbol game from the random number counter for jackpot determination (so-called special symbol lottery, hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1 lottery), and further, a jackpot symbol. A process of extracting the jackpot symbol determination random number value from the determination random number counter, extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter, and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 103 is performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) are derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random number values acquired by winning a start prize while the special symbol fluctuates. -The first special symbol start storage area (4) is stored in order. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S330.

In step S330, the winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S331.

In step S331, the main CPU 101 sets the first start opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The first start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub control circuit 200 has won the first starting opening and whether the winning lottery result is correct or not. Will be recognized. The data of the first start opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed when it is determined in the process of step S330 that the winning effect is to be produced. There is. As a result, the so-called "look-ahead effect", which is a well-known technique, enables the effect to be executed based on the start memory information before the variable execution. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, various commands set in the main RAM 103 of the main control circuit 100 are supplied to the sub control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 100.

[Movable member control process]
The movable member control process in step S306 shown in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S341, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a small hit medium process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit medium processing, the processing is shifted to step S342. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit middle process, the process shifts to step S344.

In step S342, a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 426 is operating is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine when it is determined that there is a moving flag, and shifts the process to step S343 when it is determined that there is no moving flag.

In step S343, the movable member 426 is started to operate, and a process of turning on the moving flag is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S344, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing is shifted to step S345. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing is transferred to step S347.

In step S345, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0. When the main CPU 101 determines that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S346. If it is determined that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is not 0, this subroutine is terminated. In the present embodiment, the residual ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 5000 msec, and since the "V winning" is effective until 5000 msec elapses, the movable member is also in a movable state.

In step S346, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable member 426 and turns off the moving flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, when the remaining ball monitoring time of 5000 msec at the end of the small hit elapses, the moving flag is turned off and the "small hit game state" ends.

In step S347, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process shifts to step S348. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S348, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine when it is determined that there is no moving flag, and shifts the process to step S349 when it is determined that there is a moving flag. If the "small hit" is "V winning", the moving flag is on, so the process is moved to step S349, and if it is just a "big hit", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S349, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable member 426 and performs a process of turning off the moving flag. That is, in the "big hit game", the movable member 426 does not need to operate. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Sub-control main processing]
The sub-control main process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 100 and performs various processes such as display processing. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

In step S1011, the initialization process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of initializing and setting according to the power-on. For example, when RAM clear information is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, all the flags are turned off and the RAM clear flag is turned on. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1012. This initialization process can also be performed according to the on / off operation of the power supply.

In step S1012, the random number update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the random number stored in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1013.

In step S1013, command analysis processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 100 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203. This process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1014.

In step S1014, the effect control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201, for example, controls the effect using the effect button 16 and the touch sensor 450. Further, the look-ahead hold effect control or the like related to the hold ball may be executed by the so-called look-ahead effect described above. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1015.

In step S1015, display control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 50 to the display control circuit 210. In the display control circuit 210, the VDP (not shown) has various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image under the control of the sub CPU 201. Is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1016.

In step S1016, control processing such as sound and lamp is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 executes a voice control process for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 14 and a lamp control process for controlling the light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process is completed, the process is moved to the random number update process (step S1012) again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even in the state in which the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 38 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be executed. The timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 39.

In step S1021, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1022.

In step S1022, the timer update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, a process of updating a timer such as a round effect is performed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1023.

In step S1023, the effect button switch input detection process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of an input of a switch (not shown) by operating the effect button 16 or the touch sensor 450. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S1024. Although this effect button switch input detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process, other interrupts may be used.

In step S1024, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in step S1021 to each register. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 38 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the command interrupt process may be executed. The command interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S1031, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1032.

In step S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the received command in the buffer. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1033.

In step S1033, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in step S1031 to each register. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in step S1013 of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

In step S1041, a process of determining whether or not a command has been received is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and if it determines that there is a receive command, the process is transferred to step S1042, and the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a receive command. If no judgment is made, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1042, a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol effect start command is performed. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a special symbol effect start command, it shifts the process to step S1043, and if it does not determine that it is a special symbol effect start command, it shifts the process to step S1044.

In step S1043, processing is performed when a special symbol effect start command is received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect of the special symbol game. Specifically, a process of storing data related to the game state, the fluctuation pattern, the special symbol, and the number of remaining time reductions included in the special symbol effect start command is performed in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1044, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined that it is a symbol stop command, the process is transferred to step S1045, and if it is not determined that it is a special symbol effect stop command, the process is transferred to step S1046.

In step S1045, processing is performed when a symbol stop command is received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as stopping the identification symbol for effect in synchronization with the stop of the special symbol controlled by the main control circuit 100, for example. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1046, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a jackpot start command. If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command, the process is transferred to step S1047, and if it is not determined that the command is a jackpot start command, the process is transferred to step S1048.

In step S1047, processing at the time of receiving the jackpot start command is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing data related to the effect before the start of the round game in the work RAM 203, such as the effect of the jackpot notification and the effect of the right-handed instruction. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1048, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process is transferred to step S1049, and if it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process is transferred to step S1050.

In step S1049, processing is performed when a small hit start command is received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing data related to the effect before the attacker 421 is released, such as a small hit notification effect and a right-handed instruction effect, in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1050, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a V jackpot start command. If it is determined that it is a V jackpot start command, the process is transferred to step S1051, and if it is not determined that it is a V jackpot start command, the process is transferred to step S1052.

In step S1051, processing at the time of receiving the V jackpot start command is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing data related to the effect before the start of the round game in the work RAM 203, such as an effect of V jackpot notification and an effect of right-handed instruction. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a large winning opening opening display command. If it is determined that the command is for the large winning opening opening display command, the process is moved to step S1053, and if it is not determined that the command is for the large winning opening opening display command, the processing is moved to step S1054.

In step S1053, processing is performed when a large winning opening opening display command is received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing data related to the effect during the round game in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1054, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a normal symbol effect start command. If it is determined that the command is a normal symbol effect start command, the process is transferred to step S1055, and if it is not determined that the command is a normal symbol effect start command, the process is transferred to step S1056.

In step S1055, processing is performed when a normal symbol effect start command is received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing in the work RAM 203 data related to the game state, the fluctuation time, the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory, which are included in the normal symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1056, the sub CPU 201 performs processing at the time of receiving other commands. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Game description of pachinko game machine 1]
FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a gaming method in the normal gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the gaming method in the normal gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is.

In the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 7B, since the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol game is 0. Therefore, for example, as shown by the arrow a2, the game ball is hit right. Is passed through the ball passage detector 416, but the ordinary electric accessory 415a does not open. Therefore, both the first non-electric accessory 415b and the second non-electric accessory 415c do not open. Therefore, in the normal game state, as shown by the arrow a1 in FIG. 43, the player strikes left and aims to win the central starting port 414a.

In the normal game state, if a prize is won in the central start port 414a, a special figure 1 lottery is performed, and if this special figure 1 lottery is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state, and the big hit game ends. Later, as shown in FIG. 7C, the player shifts to either the normal gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state.

In the second time-shortening game state, as shown in FIG. 7B, since the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is 100%, the normal electric accessory 415a always opens when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416. .. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit the ball to the right and switch the hitting method for passing the game ball through the ball passage detector 416. Then, when the normal electric accessory 415a opens and captures the game ball, the game ball activates the second non-electric accessory 415c, so that the second non-electric accessory 415c is as shown in FIG. 44 (a). Is opened, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 414c. When the second starting port 414c is won, the special figure 2 lottery is executed. In the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), a small hit is obtained in most cases, so the attacker 421 is opened as shown in FIG. 44 (b).

When the attacker 421 is opened, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the opening / closing winning opening 420, and when the game ball passing through the opening / closing winning opening 420 enters the V winning opening 424, it becomes a V jackpot and shifts to the V jackpot game state. To do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7A, there is a case where a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and when the big hit is won, the game shifts to the big hit game state. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game state by the special figure 2 lottery and the V big hit game state are compared, the first round is different, and the same game is executed after that.

In the case of a big hit or a V big hit from the special figure 2 lottery, after the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), the game is played in one of the normal game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state. The state shifts. The games in the normal game state and the second time reduction game state are as described above.

In the first time-shortening game state, as shown in FIG. 7B, the winning probability of the normal symbol game is 100%. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416, the normal electric accessory 415a is always used. open. Therefore, the right-handed ball is continuously hit to pass the game ball through the ball passing detector 416. When the ordinary electric accessory 415a opens and captures the game ball, the game ball activates the first non-electric accessory 415b, so that the first non-electric accessory 415b is opened as shown in FIG. 45. It becomes easy to win a prize in the first starting port 414b. When the first starting port 414b is won, the special figure 1 lottery is executed. In the special figure 1 lottery, as described above, since the small hit winning probability is 0, it is not a V big hit. If a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the game state shifts to the big hit game state. In the first time-shortened game state, the possibility of V jackpot is lower than in the second time-shortened game state, but the ordinary electric accessory 415a is easier to open than in the normal game state, and based on this, the special per unit time FIG. 1 Since the number of lottery is large, the gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and more disadvantageous than the second time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when the state shifts to the second time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, there is a high possibility that the second time-saving game state and the big hit game state occur repeatedly, so that the player receives many prizes. You will be able to expect a ball. In addition, when a big hit or a V big hit occurs in the second time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is not reached after the big hit game state ends, as shown in FIG. 7C, the normal game state and the first time-shortened game state Move to one of. In the case of shifting to the first time-saving game state, the player can aim for the next big hit by the special figure 1 lottery without reducing the number of balls so much, so in the special figure 2 lottery, the player shifts to the second time-saving game state. Even if the result of the lottery is not, by shifting to the first time-saving game state, compared to the conventional type 1 and type 2 mixer that always shifts to the normal game state if it does not shift to the second time-saving game state. , It is possible to raise the degree of expectation and interest in the case of not winning the second short game state.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol game during the big hit (small hit) game is set to 0. Therefore, the normal electric accessory 415a is not driven during the big hit (small hit) game. Therefore, it is difficult to open the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c in the big hit game state.

Even if the game ball remains in the second passage 505 at the time of shifting to the big hit (small hit) gaming state and the second non-electric accessory 415c opens immediately after the attacker 421 opens, the attacker 421 is the first. 2 Since it is arranged in the vicinity of the non-electric accessory 415c, the game ball enters the second non-electric accessory 415c immediately after the attacker 421 is closed, and the second non-electric accessory 415c is closed. It becomes a state. Therefore, the second non-electric accessory 415c will not be opened after the big hit (small hit) gaming state ends. Further, since there is no hold in the special figure 2, when the player passes during the big hit, the special figure 2 is not changed accordingly, and it is possible to prevent the small hit from being won except in the second short game state.

According to the present embodiment configured in this way, when the second time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player ends, the player's motivation to continue the game is significantly reduced, and after the end of the 15-round round game. , The immediate game may end. However, when the second time-saving game state ends due to a big hit, there are cases where 100 times of time-saving times can be obtained (in the case of 15R time-saving 1 big hit), so at least 100 times of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 are completed. You will continue to play the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to continue the game due to the end of the second time-saving game state. In addition, since the player will play the game for a long time with the same game machine, it becomes possible to put more game machines into operation on the playground side. In this way, it is also advantageous for the amusement park side.

According to the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 starting port is won, the special symbol display device 431 fluctuates and displays only in the state where the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, if all the reserved balls due to the special figure 1 starting opening winning are not digested, the special drawing 2 change due to the special drawing 2 starting opening winning is not executed. For this reason, when shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that has shifted from the normal gaming state, if there are remaining reserved balls due to the special figure 1 starting opening winning, the number of reserved balls is disadvantageous to the player. A lottery will be held.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the production of the jackpot notification in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect (for example, the hold ball effect, the zone effect, etc.) is set to be involved in many cases of the jackpot. As a result, the player can stop the firing of the game ball and prevent the number of reserved balls from increasing when the look-ahead effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the end of the first special gaming state, that is, the jackpot gaming state or the V jackpot gaming state, the jackpot is 15 rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving gaming state is achieved after digesting two rounds in a short time. It may be a so-called sudden time reduction (abbreviated as a sudden time).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 1 lottery is 0, but as described above, there is a possibility of winning a small hit in both the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. At that time, the winning probability of the small hit of either the special figure 1 lottery or the special figure 2 lottery may be 0.
In addition, when there is a small hit by the special figure 1 lottery, the game state is distributed after the big hit game state is completed by the V big hit via the small hit of the first special symbol game, and the big hit and the second special of the second special symbol game. The distribution of the game state after the end of the big hit game state by the V big hit via the small hit of the symbol game may be the same, and the game state may be shifted to the normal game state, the first time reduction game state, or the second time reduction game state with the same probability. ..

[Modification 1]
Next, a modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
In the first modification, the specifications of the second open pattern group shown in FIG. 7 (e) and the open patterns C and D of FIG. 8 are shown in the present embodiment described above, and the specifications of the second open pattern group shown in FIG. It is changed to the opening pattern E and the opening pattern F shown in FIG. 47. Further, according to the first modification, the normal electric accessory 415a opens and closes based on the opening pattern E described later in the first time saving game state. Further, in the modified example 1, a part of the processing is added to the processing by the sub-control circuit 200 in the above-described embodiment. Since the other parts are the same as those in the present embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 shows a modified example of the distribution table for distributing the open patterns belonging to the second open pattern group. An open pattern E is associated with the random value of the normal symbol 1 to which the random value in the range in which the selectivity is 50/100 in the normal symbol (for example, 0 to 49 in 0 to 99) belongs, and the normal symbol has an open pattern E. An open pattern F is associated with the random value of the normal symbol 2 to which another random value in the range of 50/100 (for example, 50 to 99 in 0 to 99) belongs.

[Explanation of open pattern]
Next, the opening patterns E and F will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
According to the opening pattern E, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is momentarily opened and closed (T2) at the timing when the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game stops at the hit symbol, and then closed for a predetermined time (T6), and then is predetermined. Time (T7) is open. Further, the sum of the momentary opening / closing time (T2) and the subsequent closed state (T6) is the flat plate of the normal electric accessory 415a from the time when the launching device 20 launches the game ball. The time required to reach the member 520 (T5) is set. Further, the open state time (T7) is set to be slightly shorter than the closed state time (T6) immediately before that.

The distribution device 506 immediately switches the path of the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c side at the timing when the normal symbol hits and stops at the symbol, that is, at the same timing as the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 415a ( After the lapse of time T2), the first non-electric accessory 415b side is switched to. Since this switching operation is instantaneously performed at the timing when the normal symbol hits and stops at the symbol, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is rarely distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. Then, the distribution device 506 switches to the second non-electric accessory 415c side again, and switches to the first non-electric accessory 415b side after a predetermined time (T7) elapses, that is, immediately before the normal electric accessory 415a opens. That is, in the opening pattern E, the distribution device 506 is switched to the second non-electric accessory 415c side during the time zone when the ordinary electric accessory 415a is closed, and the ordinary electric accessory 415a is open during the time zone. The distribution device 506 is switched to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. Therefore, the game ball launched at the timing when the normal symbol hits and stops at the symbol is likely to be captured by the normal electric accessory 415a and move to the first non-electric accessory 415b side.

According to the opening pattern F, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 415a in the opening pattern E is partially different. That is, in the opening pattern F, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened at a predetermined time (T7) when the distribution device 506 in the opening pattern E switches from the first non-electric accessory 415b side to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. .. Then, after the predetermined time (T8) has elapsed, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened again for the predetermined time (T7). Other than that, the opening pattern F is the same as the opening pattern E.

That is, in the open pattern F, there is a high possibility that the game ball launched at the timing when the normal symbol game is hit is captured by the normal electric accessory 415a and moves to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. However, there is a high possibility that the game ball launched when the normal symbol is changing is captured by the normal electric accessory 415a and moves to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. As described above, the open patterns E and F are examples in which the third displacement member (flat plate member 520) is driven by an example of a plurality of drive patterns.

[Processing when receiving a command to start normal symbol production]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the normal symbol effect start command) executed in step S1055 of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

In step S1061, the variable display setting of the normal symbol for production is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a variation display mode from the start to the stop of the variation of the normal symbol for effect. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1062. Specifically, the normal symbol for production consists of two-digit numbers from 00 to 99, and during the variable display of the normal symbol for production, the second digit number is stopped and displayed early at the start of the variable display. The digit number is in a variable display state. Then, when the sub control circuit 200 receives the normal symbol stop command from the main control circuit 100, the first digit is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol game is displayed. In the first modification, if the normal symbol game is a hit, the game is stopped and displayed with doublet. Further, in the case where the normal symbol game is a hit, when the open pattern F is selected as the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 415a, it is stopped and displayed with an odd number of doublets, and when other open patterns are selected. Is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets. Therefore, the player can predict which of the first non-electric accessory 415b and the second non-electric accessory 415c will open by confirming the stop display mode of the second digit.

In step S1062, a process of determining whether or not the opening pattern E is performed is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the open pattern E is selected as the open pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and if it is determined that the open pattern E is selected, the process is transferred to step S1063. If it is not determined that the opening pattern E has been selected, the process proceeds to step S1064.

In step S1063, the firing timing notification setting process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the time zone of various effects to be executed within the time of the opening pattern E, and performs a process of setting the effect contents to be executed in that time zone. .. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1064, a process of determining whether or not the opening pattern F is performed is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the opening pattern E is selected as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and if it is determined that the opening pattern F is selected, the process is transferred to step S1065. If it is not determined that the open pattern F is selected, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1065, the firing timing notification setting process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the same process as in step S1063. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In this way, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of steps S1063 and S1065 determines the launch timing that is likely to be guided to the second passage when the launched game medium is captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520). This is an example of making it possible to notify.

[Launch timing notification setting process]
The subroutine (effect control process) executed in steps S1063 and S1065 of FIG. 48 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1071, the sub CPU 201 calculates the game ball launch required time zone. The game ball launch required time zone corresponds to the time zone in which the launched game ball passes through the second passage 505. In this process, the sub CPU 201 has a timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened, a time for the distribution device 506 to switch to the second passage 505 side, and a game ball after the game ball is launched to the distribution device 506. Based on the time it takes to reach the ball, the process of calculating the required time zone for launching the game ball based on the time when the normal symbol stops is performed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1072.

In step S1072, the notification effect setting of the game ball launch required time zone is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets in the work RAM 203 data for navigation display (see the navigation display 56 in FIG. 51) in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 so as to launch the game ball during the game ball launch essential time zone. To do. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1073. In this way, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of steps S1063 and S1065, when the launched game ball is captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520) in the second specific state (second time saving game state). This is an example of making it possible to notify the launch timing at which the game ball is likely to be guided to the second passage 505.

In step S1073, the game ball launch stop time zone is calculated. The game ball launch stop time zone corresponds to the time zone in which the launched game ball passes through the first passage 504. In this process, the sub CPU 201 has a timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened, a time for the distribution device 506 to switch to the first passage 504 side, and a game ball after the game ball is launched to the distribution device 506. Based on the time until it arrives, the process of calculating the game ball launch stop time zone based on the time when the normal symbol stops is performed. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1074.

In step S1074, the notification effect setting of the game ball launch stop time zone is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 displays data in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 (see the navigation display 56 in FIG. 51) so as to stop the launch of the game ball during the game ball launch stop time zone. Set to. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S1075.

In step S1075, the player participation production time zone for performing the player participation production using the touch sensor 450 is calculated. In this process, the sub CPU 201 has the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened, the time when the distribution device 506 switches to the first passage side, and the game ball reaches the distribution device 506 after firing the game ball. Based on the time until the game ball is launched and the time interval for launching the game ball, a process of calculating the player participation effect time zone based on the time when the normal symbol is stopped is performed. The player participation production time zone is set to be slightly longer than the game ball launch stop time zone. That is, it is set longer by the time for preventing the game ball that has already been launched from passing through the first passage 504 when the display prompting the operation of the touch sensor 450 (see the touch sensor guide display 57 in FIG. 51) is displayed. Will be done. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In this way, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of steps S1071 to S1075 arrives at the second passage 505 during the period when the launched game ball reaches the second passage 505 during the period when the normal symbol is fluctuating. This is an example of an effect control means for performing an effect of notifying the existence.

[Direction control processing]
The subroutine (effect control process) executed in step S1014 of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1081, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is within the player participation effect time zone. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is within the player participation production time zone, the process is transferred to step S1082. If it is not determined that it is within the player participation production time zone, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S1082, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the touch sensor 450 is being operated. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the touch sensor 450 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S1083. If it is not determined that the touch sensor 450 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S1085.

In step S1083, an effect based on the operation of the touch sensor 450 is executed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 outputs data for displaying a predetermined effect image (see the game effect display 58 shown in FIG. 51) in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 according to the operation time of the touch sensor 450. Set to. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1084.

In step S1084, a process of adding points is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a point value for effect in response to the operation of the touch sensor 450, and adds the point value to the point value already stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1085.

In step S1085, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the point value exceeds a preset reference value. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the preset reference value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S1086. If it is not determined that the preset reference value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S1088.

In step S1086, the effect based on the fact that the point value exceeds the reference value is executed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the work RAM 203 with data for executing a predetermined effect based on the point value exceeding the reference value. As the predetermined effect, for example, a menu screen for switching music by operating the effect button 16 by the player is displayed, a QR code (registered trademark) for obtaining a predetermined privilege is displayed, or based on the acquired point value. For example, displaying the game rating. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1087.

In step S1087, the point value is reset. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing "0" in the storage area in the work RAM 203 that stores the point value. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1088.

In step S1088, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect processing. For example, when the main CPU 101 drives the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the distribution device 506 in the open pattern E or the open pattern F, the sub CPU 201 sets the game ball launch essential time zone or the game ball launch stop time zone. A process of storing data for displaying an image prompting the launch of the game ball and an image prompting the stop launch of the game ball (navigation display 56 in FIG. 51) in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In this way, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of steps S1081 to S1088 is the launching means (launching device 20) when it is the timing to reach the first passage 504 during the period of distributing the fired game ball to the first passage 504. This is an example of an effect control means for controlling the effect means (liquid crystal display device 50) so as to perform an effect for operating the user.

[Explanation of production screen]
An example of the effect screen displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. Note that FIGS. 51 and 52 show the transition of the display screen in the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50, and the special symbol 53 for the effect of deriving and displaying the result of the special symbol game, the ordinary symbol. Only the normal symbol 54 for the effect of deriving and displaying the result of the game, the number of reserved balls display 55, the navigation display 56, the touch sensor guide display 57, and the game effect display 58 are shown. The reserved ball number display 55 shows the reserved balls based on the winning of the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b, and a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed. The navigation display 56 indicates the launch timing of the game ball to the player. Here, the navigation display 56 is displayed in the case of the second time saving game state. In other words, when the navigation display 56 is displayed, the player can determine that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. The touch sensor guide display 57 indicates the timing for operating the touch sensor 450. Here, the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed at a time when the launched game ball enters the first starting port 414b. The game effect display 58 is displayed by operating the touch sensor 450.

Further, FIG. 51 is an example of a display screen when the open pattern F is selected and is a hit in the normal symbol game in the second time saving game state, and FIG. 52 is a hit in the normal symbol game in the second time saving game state. This is an example of a display screen when the open pattern E is selected.

FIG. 51 (a) shows a display mode of the normal symbol 54 at the start of fluctuation. The normal symbol 54 consists of two-digit numbers, and when the ball passage detector 416 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball, the first and second digits of the numbers are independently changed and displayed. Become.

FIG. 51 (b) shows a display mode immediately after the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol 54. Immediately after the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is stopped and displayed, and the navigation display 56 for prompting right-handed is displayed in the display area 51. In the first modification, the stop display mode of the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is an odd number (for example, “3”), and the character information “right-handed continuation” is displayed in the display area 51 as the navigation display 56. The player who sees this display can know in advance that the second non-electric accessory 415c may be opened by continuing right-handed striking.

FIG. 51 (c) shows a display mode of the normal symbol 54 before the fluctuation is stopped. The touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed before the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped, that is, before the launched game ball is distributed to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. Here, as the touch sensor guide display 57, the character information "Hold your right hand!" Is displayed. The player who sees the touch sensor guide display 57 can know that the timing to stop the firing of the game ball is near.

FIG. 51 (d) shows a display mode immediately before the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped. At this point, the navigation display 56 is switched from "right-handed continuation" to "launch stop". If the player immediately stops firing the game ball according to the navigation display 56 when the navigation display 56 is displayed, it is possible to prevent the first non-electric accessory 415b from opening. The player can stop the launch of the game ball by pressing the stop button (not shown) for stopping the launch of the game ball or by releasing the hand from the launch handle.

Further, while the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, the game effect display 58 is displayed by the player holding his right hand over the touch sensor 450. The game effect display 58 displays additional points such as "+5" and "+10", and the longer the right hand is held over the touch sensor 450, the more points can be obtained. The time when the game effect display 58 is displayed is set to the time when the launched game ball wins the first starting port 414b. That is, even if the player does not notice that the navigation display 56 has switched from "continue right-handed" to "stop firing", when the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, the player moves his right hand according to the displayed contents. When is held over the touch sensor 450, the player has released his hand from the launch handle, so that the launch of the game ball is stopped. Moreover, if the player holds the ball for a long time so as to reach the maximum point, the launch of the game ball will be stopped at the time when the launched game ball wins the first start port 414b. It is possible to avoid winning a prize in 414b.

The player appropriately selects whether or not to stop the firing of the game ball. For example, if you want to draw a big hit quickly regardless of the advantages or disadvantages after the big hit game, such as when the closing time of the game hall is near, you can continue to hit right.

FIG. 51 (e) shows a display mode of the normal symbol 54 at the time when the fluctuation is stopped. At this point, the stop display mode of the fluctuating first digit symbol becomes "3", and the normal symbol 54 becomes doublet of "3".

FIG. 51 (f) shows a display mode at the time when the ordinary electric accessory 415a finishes driving by a series of opening / closing patterns after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol 54 is stopped. After the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped, when the game ball is no longer likely to be sent from the normal electric accessory 415a to the first operating mechanism 511 even if the game ball is fired, the navigation display 56 is changed from "launch stop". The character information is switched to "restart firing", the touch sensor guide display 57 disappears from the screen, and the game effect display 58 displays the points acquired by operating the touch sensor 450, for example, the character information "100pt acquisition". The player who sees this display can know when to resume right-handed striking.

FIG. 52A shows a display mode of the normal symbol 54 at the start of fluctuation. When the ball passage detector 416 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball, the normal symbol 54 is in the variable display state.

FIG. 52 (b) shows a display mode immediately after the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol 54. Immediately after the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is stopped and displayed. In the first modification, the stop display mode of the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is an even number (for example, “4”). The player who sees this display can know in advance that the first non-electric accessory 415b may be opened by continuing right-handed striking.

FIG. 52 (c) shows a display mode of the normal symbol 54 before the fluctuation is stopped. The touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed before the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped, that is, before the launched game ball is distributed to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. Here, as the touch sensor guide display 57, the character information "Hold your right hand!" Is displayed. The player who sees the touch sensor guide display 57 can know that the timing to stop the firing of the game ball is near. At this point, the navigation display 56 "continue right-handed" is displayed in FIG. 51 (c), but is not displayed in FIG. 52 (c). This is because, in the short-time game state, the player is basically right-handed, and since the second non-electric accessory 415c is unlikely to be in the open state, it is not necessary to display "continue right-handed". In this way, by driving the electric accessory with a plurality of drive patterns (open patterns E and F), it is possible to give variety to the effect of notifying the launch timing of the game ball.

FIG. 52 (d) shows a display mode immediately before the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped. At this point, the navigation display 56 composed of the character information "launch stop" is displayed. If the player immediately stops firing the game ball according to the navigation display 56 when the navigation display 56 is displayed, it is possible to prevent the first non-electric accessory 415b from opening. The player can stop the launch of the game ball by pressing the stop button (not shown) for stopping the launch of the game ball or by releasing the hand from the launch handle.

In addition, the launch of the game ball is stopped. While the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, the game effect display 58 is displayed when the player holds his right hand over the touch sensor 450. The game effect display 58 displays additional points such as "+5" and "+10", and the longer the right hand is held over the touch sensor 450, the more points can be obtained. The time when the game effect display 58 is displayed is set to the time when the launched game ball wins the first starting port 414b. That is, even if the player does not notice the navigation display 56 that says "launch stopped", if the player holds his right hand over the touch sensor 450 according to the displayed contents when the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, , Since the player has released his hand from the launch handle, the launch of the game ball will be stopped. Moreover, if the player holds the ball for a long time so as to reach the maximum point, the launch of the game ball will be stopped at the time when the launched game ball wins the first start port 414b. It is possible to avoid winning a prize in 414b.

FIG. 52 (e) shows a display mode of the normal symbol 54 at the time when the fluctuation is stopped. At this point, the stop display mode of the fluctuating first digit symbol becomes "4", and the normal symbol 54 becomes doublet of "4".

FIG. 52 (f) shows a display mode at the time when the ordinary electric accessory 415a finishes driving by a series of opening / closing patterns after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol 54 is stopped. After the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped, when the game ball is no longer likely to be sent from the normal electric accessory 415a to the first operating mechanism 511 even if the game ball is fired, the navigation display 56 is changed from "launch stop". The character information is switched to "restart firing", the touch sensor guide display 57 disappears from the screen, and the game effect display 58 displays the points acquired by operating the touch sensor 450, for example, the character information "100pt acquisition". The player who sees this display can know when to resume right-handed striking.

By the way, after the end of the big hit game state, the game state shifts to any of the normal game state, the first time reduction game state, and the second time reduction game state, but the second time reduction game state in which V hit may occur. Is advantageous for the player. In addition, the probability of shifting to the second short-time gaming state is higher in the special figure 2 lottery by winning the second non-electric accessory 415c than in the special figure 1 lottery by winning the first non-electric accessory 415b. From this, when the opening pattern F is selected, the first non-electric accessory 415b can be prevented from opening by following the navigation display 56, so that the second time-saving gaming state which is advantageous for the player can be obtained. It will be possible to maintain.

According to the modification 1 configured in this way, the player switches between launching the game ball and stopping launching the game ball according to the navigation display 56, or operates the touch sensor 450 according to the touch sensor guide display 57. , The second non-electric accessory 415c can be opened more often, and the first non-electric accessory 415b can be avoided from opening. When the opening pattern F shown in FIG. 51 is selected, it is confirmed that the game ball has been captured by the ordinary electric accessory 415a while the navigation display 56 "Right-handed continuation" is displayed. At that point, the launch of the game ball is stopped. Then, after confirming that the second non-electric accessory 415c has been opened and the navigation display 56 saying "restart launch", the launch of the game ball may be resumed.

Further, in the first modification, both the navigation display 56 and the touch sensor guide display 57 stop the launch of the game ball during the game ball launch stop time zone in order to prevent the first non-electric accessory 415b from opening. It notifies the timing of making it. Therefore, only one of the navigation display 56 and the touch sensor guide display 57 may be displayed. However, since some players do not operate the effect button 16 or the touch sensor 450, it is desirable to display at least the navigation display 56. Further, since the navigation display 56 does not allow the player to play the game and may be inappropriate when viewed from the hall side, in that case, only the touch sensor guide display 57 may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described modified example 1, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special figure 1 lottery in that the possibility of winning a V is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. If the two lottery has an advantage over the special figure 1 lottery, the modified example 1 can be applied. For example, the jackpot game triggered by the special figure 2 lottery is a V probability variation machine in which the number of rounds is larger than that of the jackpot game triggered by the special figure 1 lottery, the opening time of the shutter 417 or the attacker 421 in the round game is long. The big hit game triggered by the special figure 2 lottery is easier to win the V winning opening than the big hit game triggered by the special figure 1 lottery. The special figure 2 lottery is easier than the special figure 1 lottery, for example, FIG. 51 ( As shown in f) and FIG. 52 (f), it is easy to obtain points for giving some privilege to the player, the selection range of back music during the big hit game is large, and the premier production is easy to appear. Be done.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, the navigation display 56 is displayed in the case of the second time-saving game state, but is not limited to this. For example, the distribution device 506 is also in the first time-saving game state. A navigation display 56 that informs the timing of distribution to the second passage 505 by the distribution device 506 may be displayed, including an opening pattern having a short time for distribution to the two passages 505. As a result, even in the first short-time game state, it is possible to give an opportunity for a V jackpot, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 2]
Next, a modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
In the second modification, the specifications of the jackpot distribution shown in FIG. 7C are changed to the specifications of the jackpot distribution shown in FIG. 53 in the above-described embodiment. Since the other parts are the same as those in the present embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 shows an example of a jackpot distribution table. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit by a special symbol game and a V big hit, the big hits are 15 rounds normal big hit, 15 rounds short A big hit, 15 rounds short B big hit, 15 rounds short C big hit, 15 rounds short D big hit. It is distributed to one of. Here, the 15-round normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and the time is not shortened after the jackpot game state ends. The 15-round time-saving A jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and the first time-saving game state is set up to 100 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game state. The 15-round time-saving B jackpot means that the number of round games is 15 times, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the second time-saving game state is set to 1 to 20 fluctuations, and the 1st time-saving game state is set to 21 to 100 times. It's a big hit. The 15-round time-saving C jackpot means that the number of round games is 15 times, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the second time-saving game state is set to 1 to 50 fluctuations, and the 1st time-saving game state is set to 51 to 100 times. It's a big hit. The 15-round time-saving D jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and, after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of fluctuations is up to 100 times in the second time-saving game state.

In the above-mentioned distribution of the time saving contents, in the process of step S218 shown in FIG. 24, the number of fluctuations in the second time saving game state and the number of fluctuations in the first time saving game state are set. Then, in the process of step S225 shown in FIG. 25, the main CPU 101 counts the number of fluctuations in the second time-saving game state and the number of fluctuations in the first time-saving game state, and when the total is 100 times. , Shift the game state to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned distribution of time-saving contents is merely an example, and may be another distribution. For example, a 15-round time-saving A jackpot is defined as a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and the number of fluctuations is up to 100, and the second time-shortening game state is set. In order, the number of fluctuations in the second time-saving game state may be reduced.

In the first special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round time saving A jackpot is 0/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round time saving B jackpot is 25. It is / 100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving C jackpot is 15/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving D jackpot is 10/100.

In the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving A jackpot is 15/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving B jackpot is 0. It is / 100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving C jackpot is 0/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving D jackpot is 65/100. That is, the time-saving gaming state in the present embodiment shifts from the second time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player to the first time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state but disadvantageous than the second time-saving gaming state. It is in a gaming state. Further, in the time saving game state in the present embodiment, the time saving number of the first time saving game state is 0 times, the time saving number of the second time saving game state is 100 times, and the time saving number of the second time saving game state is 100 times. A case where either the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is 0 times is also included, as in the case where the time-saving number of times in the time-saving game state is 0 times.

In the second modification, due to the jackpot from the normal gaming state, after the jackpot gaming state ends, there is a 50% probability that at least the first 20 times will be the second time-shortening gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the case of the special figure 2 big hit or the V big hit in this second time saving game state, there is a high possibility that the second time saving game state will be reached up to 100 fluctuations after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, the big hit game state and the second time saving game state are repeated, and as a result, the possibility that the player wins many prize balls increases.

By the way, conventionally, when a small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery, the attacker 421 is released, but at this time, the game ball is launched at the timing when the V prize is not won, and the game ball is driven into the attacker 421 to open and close. There is also a player who repeatedly passes a game ball through the winning opening 420, obtains a small number of prize balls many times, and as a result, increases the number of balls he has (so-called V removal). Specifically, it is also possible to remove the V for the first 50 times in the time-saving game state and aim for the V prize in the remaining 50 times.

However, in the second modification, if one game ball enters the opening / closing winning opening 420, the attacker 421 is closed, so that there is little merit in removing the V. Even if the specifications are such that the attacker 421 closes when several game balls enter, the second time-saving game state, which makes it easy to win a small hit, is not performed in the latter half of 100 time-saving games. Therefore, removing V will miss the opportunity to win a V prize. Therefore, in the second modification, it becomes difficult to remove the V, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game.
In the above-mentioned modified example 2, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special figure 1 lottery in that the possibility of winning a V is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. If the two lottery has an advantage over the special figure 1 lottery, the modified example 2 can be applied. Specific examples include the above-mentioned contents in the first modification.

[Modification 3]
Next, a modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
In the third modification, the specifications of the jackpot distribution shown in FIG. 7C are changed to the specifications of the jackpot distribution shown in FIG. 54 in the above-described embodiment. Since the other parts are almost the same as those of the present embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 54 shows an example of a jackpot distribution table. In the third modification, the jackpot distribution is performed in consideration of which of the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the first time saving game state, and the second time saving gaming state the big hit occurs.

In the jackpot of the first special symbol game in the normal game state (non-time saving state), the probability of being distributed to the 15 round normal jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15 round time saving 1 jackpot is 30/100. The probability of being distributed to two big hits in 15 rounds is 20/100.

In the jackpot of the first special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 10/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 10/100. The probability of being distributed to two big hits is 40/100.

In the jackpot of the first special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 0/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 0/100. The probability of being distributed to two big hits is 50/100.

That is, in the jackpot of the first special symbol game, the time-saving game state is more likely to shift to the second time-saving game state, which is advantageous to the player, than the normal game state (non-time-saving state).

In addition, in the jackpot and V jackpot of the second special symbol game in the normal game state (non-time saving state), the probability of being distributed to the 15 round normal jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15 round time saving 1 jackpot is 0. It is / 100, and the probability of being distributed to two big hits in 15 rounds is 50/100. It is extremely rare that the second special symbol game is executed in the normal game state (non-time saving state).

In the jackpot and V jackpot of the second special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 0/100. The probability of being distributed to two big hits in 15 rounds is 50/100. Although it is rare that the second special symbol game is executed in the first time-saving game state, for example, in the open pattern B shown in FIG. 8, the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a protrudes for the third time. When the game ball rides on the flat plate member 520, the second non-electric accessory 415c may open.

In the jackpot and V jackpot of the second special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 0/100. The probability of being distributed to two big hits in 15 rounds is 50/100.

Next, the subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the display command during opening of the large winning opening) executed in step S1053 of FIG. 42 in the modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

In step S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the round is to notify the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and if it is determined to be the notification round, the process is transferred to step S1092. If it is not determined that the notification round is reached, the process proceeds to step S1097.

In step S1092, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the currently executed jackpot is 15 rounds of time reduction 2, and if it is determined that the jackpot is 15 rounds of time reduction 2, the process proceeds to step S1093. If it is not determined that the time reduction is 2 for 15 rounds, the process is moved to step S1094.

In step S1093, an effect for notifying the transition to the second time-saving game state is set. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing in the work RAM 203 the data of the effect of notifying the shift to the second time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1097.

In step S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the currently executed jackpot is 15 rounds of time reduction 1, and if it is determined that the jackpot is 15 rounds of time reduction 1, the process proceeds to step S1095. If it is not determined that the time reduction is 2 for 15 rounds, the process is moved to step S1096.

In step S1095, an effect for notifying the transition to the first time-saving game state is set. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing in the work RAM 203 the data of the effect of notifying the shift to the first time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1097.

In step S1096, an effect for notifying the transition to the normal gaming state is set. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing in the work RAM 203 the data of the effect of notifying the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit game state. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S1097.

Then, by the process of step S1015 in FIG. 38, an effect image for notifying the game state after the end of the big hit game state is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 based on the effect data stored in the work RAM 203.

In step S1097, other processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting various effects to be executed in the round game. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Explanation of production screen]
An example of the effect screen displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. Note that FIGS. 56 and 57 show only the game effect display 58 for notifying the game state after the end of the big hit game state and the round game number display 59. The game effect display 58 includes a friendly character 58a, an enemy character 58b, and character information. The friendly character 58a and the enemy character 58b fight each other, and as a result, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is determined. Notify the player.

In the third modification, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game effect display 58 is displayed in the 10th to 12th rounds.

In the 10th round, as shown in FIG. 56, the ally character 58a and the enemy character 58b are displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, and in the 11th round, the battle effect screen is displayed. Then, the result is displayed in 12 rounds. If the result of the battle is a victory as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the game shifts to the second short-time game state after the jackpot game state ends. In the case of a tie as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the game shifts to the first time-shortening game state after the jackpot game state ends. If the player loses as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the game shifts to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends.

Further, the enemy character 58b may be a strong enemy as shown in FIG. 56 (a) or a weak enemy as shown in FIG. 56 (b), and appears according to the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The probability is preset.

FIG. 58 is a table showing the distribution pattern of enemies during a big hit. There are six distribution patterns: win over weak enemies, draw against weak enemies, defeat weak enemies, win against strong enemies, draw against strong enemies, and defeat strong enemies. In the case of a 15-round normal jackpot, a weak enemy has a 1/100 chance of being defeated, a strong enemy has a 99/100 chance of being defeated, and the others are not. In the case of one big hit in 15 rounds, a draw is selected for a weak enemy with a probability of 20/100, a draw is selected for a strong enemy with a probability of 80/100, and the others are not selected. In the case of two big hits in 15 rounds, the weak enemy has a 95/100 chance of winning, the strong enemy has a 5/100 chance of winning, and the others are not.

That is, if the enemy character 58b is a weak enemy, at least the possibility of shifting to the normal gaming state is quite low, and if the enemy character 58b is a strong enemy, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state cannot be expected so much. Will be notified to.

According to the modified example 3 configured in this way, as compared with the present embodiment, the jackpot from the normal gaming state has a lower probability of shifting to the second time-shortening gaming state, but shifts to the first time-saving gaming state. there is a possibility. In addition, in the jackpot from the first time-shortened gaming state, the probability of shifting to the second time-shortened gaming state is higher than that of the jackpot from the normal gaming state, and the probability of shifting to the first time-shortened gaming state is higher than that of the normal gaming state. Although it will be lower than the jackpot, there is still the possibility of shifting to the first time-saving game state. As a result, for example, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the first time-saving game state, it is not possible to shift to the first time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. For example, if a big hit occurs in the first time-shortened game state, the game may shift to the first time-shortened game state after the big hit game state ends. That is, it becomes possible to repeat the first time-shortening game state, and it becomes possible to give the player various expectations for the transition of the game state after the big hit game.
In the above-mentioned modified example 3, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special figure 1 lottery in that the possibility of winning a V is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. If the two lottery has an advantage over the special figure 1 lottery, the modified example 3 can be applied. Specific examples include the above-mentioned contents in the first modification.

[Modification example 4]
Next, a modification 4 of the present embodiment will be described. In this modification 4, by combining the opening / closing pattern of the movable member 426 and the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421, for example, a plurality of patterns including a pattern that is easy to be placed on the attacker 421 but is difficult to win a V, a pattern that is surely difficult to win a V, and the like. It constitutes a small hit opening pattern and the like.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine.
FIG. 59 (a) shows an example of a special symbol game specification table. In the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the number of holdings, the prize balls of the general winning openings 419a to 419c, the upper limit of the count number of the opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120, the large winning opening count sensor Since the upper limit of the number of counts of 113 is the same as that of the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59 (b) shows an example of a normal symbol game specification table. In the normal symbol game, there are cases of a normal game state (non-time saving state), a first time saving game state, and a second time saving game state.

In the normal game state, the winning probability is set to 0 and the number of holdings is set to 4. In the first short game state, the winning probability is set to 250/251 and the number of holdings is set to 4. The number of time reductions is set to 5. In the second short game state, the winning probability is set to 251/251 and the number of holdings is set to 4. The number of time reductions is set to 5. The number of time reductions is set by the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S218 in FIG. 24.

FIG. 59 (c) shows an example of a jackpot distribution table. In the jackpot of the first special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 1 jackpot is 25/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15-round time-saving 2 jackpot. Is 25/100. In the jackpot of the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round normal jackpot is 20/100, the probability of being allocated to the 15th round time saving 1 jackpot is 10/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round time saving 2 jackpot Is 70/100. In the case of V hit, it is the same as the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round normal jackpot is 20/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round time saving 1 jackpot is 20/100. The probability of being distributed to two big hits in 15 rounds is 70/100.

FIG. 59 (d) shows an example of a distribution table for distributing small hit opening patterns. In the modified example 4, the open pattern is set according to the group of special symbols that are small hits. In the first short game state, the open pattern a is selected when a small hit is made by the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 1, and the open pattern is selected when the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 2 is a small hit. When b is selected and a small hit is made by a special symbol of the group of small hit symbols 3, the open pattern c is selected. In the second short game state, the open pattern c is selected when a small hit is made by the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 1, and the open pattern is selected when the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 2 is a small hit. When a is selected and a small hit is made by a special symbol of the group of small hit symbols 3, the open pattern c is selected. The selection ratio of the small hit symbols 1 to 3 is 1: 1: 1.

[Explanation of small hit opening pattern]
Next, the small hit opening patterns a to c will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

The small hit opening patterns a to c are based on a combination of an attacker opening pattern that drives the attacker 421 to open and close the opening / closing winning opening 420 and a V winning opening opening pattern that drives the movable member 426 to open / close the V winning opening 424. Become. In the normal state, the attacker 421 and the movable member 426 are in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 60, the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern a repeats the operation of opening the attacker 421 from the closed state for a predetermined time and then returning it to the closed state twice in succession. As shown in FIG. 60, the V winning opening opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern a momentarily opens and closes the movable member 426 at the timing when the attacker 421 is first opened, and further, the attacker 421 opens and closes for the second time. After that, the movable member 426 is opened for a predetermined time and returned to the closed state. That is, in the small hit opening pattern a, the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is opened for the second time may win the V winning opening 424.

As shown in FIG. 60, the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b repeats the operation of opening the attacker 421 from the closed state for a predetermined time and then returning it to the closed state three times in a row. As shown in FIG. 60, the V winning opening opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b momentarily opens and closes the movable member 426 at the timing when the attacker 421 is first opened, and further, the attacker 421 opens and closes for the first time. The movable member 426 is instantaneously opened and closed during the closed state from the time when the operation is performed until the second opening is performed. That is, in the small hit opening pattern b, the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is opened for the first time may win the V winning opening 424, but from the small hit opening pattern a. Is unlikely to win the V winning opening 424.

As shown in FIG. 60, the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern c switches the attacker 421 from the closed state to the open state, and opens and closes this open state three times in succession in the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b. It is to return to the closed state continuously for the time. As shown in FIG. 60, the V winning opening opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b momentarily opens and closes the movable member 426 at the timing when the attacker 421 is first opened, and further, the V of the small hit opening pattern b At the timing of opening the movable member 426 for the second time in the winning opening opening pattern, the movable member 426 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and this open state is opened and closed twice in succession in the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b. It is to return to the closed state continuously for the time. That is, in the small hit opening pattern c, if the game ball passes through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is opened, the game ball wins the V winning opening 424 with a high probability.

Which of the small hit opening pattern a to the small hit opening pattern c is set is set with reference to the small hit opening pattern table in the process of step S135 of FIG.

As described above, in the case of the second time-shortened game state, the V big hit is likely to occur, and the second time-shortened game state is likely to occur after the end of the big hit game state, so that the second time-shortened game state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player.

Next, the game by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification 4 will be described.

In the normal game state, a left-handed strike is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the central starting port 414a. Then, when a big hit is triggered by winning a prize in the central starting port 414a, the game state shifts to one of the normal game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state after the big hit game ends.

In the normal game state, a left-handed hit is made aiming at winning a prize in the central starting port 414a. In the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, the ball passing detector 416 is aimed at and a right-handed hit is performed. Further, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is set up to the number of times the special symbol is changed 5 times. Further, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the distribution device 506 distributes the game balls so as to guide them toward the second passage 505 side. That is, since the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the special symbol changes five times, it is a small hit with a high probability. Then, in the case of a V jackpot or a jackpot by a special figure lottery in the five special symbol fluctuations, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is played in one of the normal game state, the first time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state. The state shifts. If the V jackpot or the jackpot by the special symbol lottery is not achieved in the five special symbol changes, the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state.

According to the modified example 4 configured as described above, the probability of V winning can be changed by combining the opening pattern of the movable member 426 and the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421. Therefore, for example, in the present embodiment, the non-electric accessory 415c is configured to be difficult to open in the first time-saving gaming state, but in the modified example 4, the non-electric accessory 415c is not easily opened in the first time-saving gaming state. The object 415c can be easily opened, and instead, it can be configured so that it is difficult to win a V prize. This makes it possible to give the player a chance to win a V prize in the first time-saving game state. In particular, in the modified example 4, the small hit opening pattern c is selected at a rate of 1/3 in the first time saving game state, and the small hit opening pattern c is selected at a rate of 2/3 in the second time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to win the V prize in the five time-saving games.

In the above-mentioned modified example 4, when the V jackpot or the jackpot by the special symbol lottery is not obtained in the five special symbol fluctuations, the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the distribution device 506 is switched so as to guide the game ball to the first passage 504 side to shift to the time-saving game state in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 1 lottery is not won in the time-saving game state. You may return to the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a V jackpot for the first five special symbol fluctuations, and to give the player a predetermined number of time reductions even if the V jackpot does not occur.
Further, in the above-described modified example 4, the small hit is won at 299/300 by the special drawing 2 lottery, and the small hit opening pattern is selected according to the small hit symbol. At that time, in the first time-saving game state, the selection rate of the opening pattern that is difficult to win V is high, and in the second time-saving game state, the selection rate of the opening pattern that is easy to win V is high. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the small hit is won with a probability of 1/100 by the special figure 1 lottery and the small hit opening pattern is selected, the same small hit opening pattern as in the first time saving game state is selected. It can also be a rate. At that time, the selected small hit opening pattern may be a pattern that makes it easy to win a V or a pattern that makes it difficult to win a V.

Further, the small hit opening pattern is not limited to the above-mentioned small hit opening patterns a to c, and other opening patterns may be selectable.
Further, the opening / closing pattern of the movable member 326 may be a constant pattern regardless of the small hit pattern. In this case, the winning rate to the V winning opening 424 varies depending on the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421. Therefore, as an opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421, there is a high probability that a pattern in which the attacker 421 is in the open state for a long time but it is difficult to win the V winning opening 424 or a game ball in the open state for a short time but passes through the attacker 421 is V. It is possible to create a pattern for winning a prize in the winning opening 424.

Further, according to the modified example 4, since both the game balls move to the second start port 414c side in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state, the first start port 414b is not used in the time reduction game state. It is also possible to. Therefore, it is also possible to omit the distribution device 506, the first passage 504, the second passage 505, and the non-electric accessory 415b, 415c used in the present embodiment described above.

[Modification 5]
FIGS. 61 to 63 are diagrams showing a main configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 5 is partially different in the configuration of the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment.

[Structure of winning unit 415]
The configuration of the main part of the winning unit 415 in the modified example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. The members having the same or the same function as the members constituting the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a schematic configuration of the winning unit 415 in the modified example 5, FIG. 61A is a plan view of the winning unit 415, and FIG. 61B is the vicinity of the opening 40a formed in the game board 40. FIG. 61 (c) is a side view of the winning unit 415. FIG. 62 is a front view of the winning unit 415 in the vicinity of the flat plate member 520. FIG. 62 is a plan view showing the operation of the winning unit 415. FIG. 63 is a side view showing the operation of the winning unit 415.

Comparing the winning unit 415 in the modified example 5 with the winning unit 415 shown in FIG. 5, the configuration of the first passage 504 and the second passage 505, the provision of the link mechanism 522, and the omission of the distribution device 506 are obtained. It's different.

As shown in FIG. 61, a substantially rectangular opening 40a is formed on the board surface of the game board 40, and this opening 40a is arranged below the ball passage detector 416 so that the game ball can pass through. It is formed in a substantially rectangular shape of various sizes. The vertical length of the opening 40a is set to be slightly longer than the sum of the diameter of the game ball, and the horizontal length is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. The flat plate member 520 is made of a rectangular plate-shaped member whose width is slightly shorter than the lateral length of the opening 40a, and is installed so as to project and retract with respect to the opening 40a. The tip of the flat plate member 520 when retracted into the opening 40a faces the lower part inside the opening 40a, and the tip of the flat plate member 520 moves from the opening 40a to the game board in response to the operation of the normal electric accessory solenoid 111. It protrudes and retracts from the board surface of 40. Further, the upper surface of the tip portion of the flat plate member 520 is gently inclined downward from the tip toward the back side, so that the game ball on the tip portion of the flat plate member 520 can easily move toward the opening 40a. ..

The second passage 505 of the modified example 5 is composed of a substantially square tubular member, and the tip end portion is arranged at the lower end side edge portion of the opening 40a on the back surface side of the game board 40. At the tip of the second passage 505 of the modified example 5, a second passage entrance 505a that is open vertically upward is formed.

The first passage 504 of the modified example 5 is composed of a substantially square tubular member, and the tip end portion is arranged in parallel on the back surface side of the game board 40 so as to be in close contact with the second passage 505. At the tip of the first passage 504 of the modified example 5, a first passage entry port 504a that is open vertically upward is formed. On the back side of the game board 40, the first passage entry port 504a is arranged on the back side and the second passage entry port 505a is arranged on the front side, and the front end surface of the first passage entry port 504a and the second passage entry. The tip surface of the ball mouth 505a is formed flush with each other.

The flat plate member 520 is arranged above the first passage entry port 504a, and can be slidably moved along the first passage entry port 504a and the second passage entry port 505a.

Further, the length of the flat plate member 520 in the longitudinal direction is set so that the rear end of the flat plate member 520 is arranged near the back surface of the game board 40 in a state where the tip end portion of the flat plate member 520 protrudes from the opening 40a. There is. Further, the second passage entry port 505a is arranged at a position where it is opened when the flat plate member 520 protrudes and is closed when the flat plate member 520 is retracted.

The link mechanism 522 transmits the operation of the solenoid iron core of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111 to the flat plate member 520, and slides the flat plate member 520 with a constant stroke. That is, when the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111 operates and the tip of the flat plate member 520 protrudes from the opening 40a, both the first passage entry port 504a and the second passage entry port 505a are opened. At the same time, it becomes possible to capture the game ball rolling on the board surface of the game board 40. When the normal electric accessory solenoid 111 switches the operation and the tip of the flat plate member 520 is pulled in from the opening 40a, the rear end of the flat plate member 520 is the first passage entry port 504a and the second passage entry port. Positioned at a portion partitioning the 505a, the second passage entry port 505a is closed by the flat plate member 520, and it becomes impossible to capture the game ball rolling on the board surface of the game board 40. At this time, the first passage entry port 504a is in an open state.

Next, the operation of the winning unit 415 of the modification 5 will be described.
In the first and second short game states, while the normal symbol is fluctuating, as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 63 (a), the flat plate member 520 is retracted, so that the player is hit right. The game ball passes near the opening 40a and falls as it is.

When the normal symbol game is won in the second short game state, the flat plate member 520 protrudes from the board surface of the game board 40 for a predetermined time, and as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 63 (b), the second passage The ball entry port 505a is opened only once for a relatively long time (hereinafter referred to as long opening). The time for the flat plate member 520 to protrude during the long opening is the time from when the game ball is caught on the tip of the flat plate member 520 until it is confirmed that the flat plate member 520 reaches the second operating mechanism 513, that is, the second passage. It is set to be longer than the time required to reach the entrance 505a. Therefore, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 moves on the flat plate member 520 and enters the second passage entry port 505a on the front side. The game ball that has passed through the second passage entry port 505a operates the operating mechanism 513 to open the second non-electric accessory 415c.

When the normal symbol game is won in the first time-shortening game state, the flat plate member 520 protrudes onto the board surface of the game board 40 a plurality of times within a predetermined time, and the second passage entry port 505a is opened for a short time (hereinafter, A state of (referred to as short opening) is formed multiple times. The time for the flat plate member 520 to protrude during the short opening is set shorter than the time for the game ball to reach the second passage entrance 505a after being caught on the tip of the flat plate member 520 during the long opening. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 62 (c) and 63 (c), the game ball on the flat plate member 520 tries to move on the flat plate member 520 while the flat plate member 520 is protruding. Previously, the flat plate member 520 slides and moves while the game ball is on the flat plate member 520, and the second passage entry port 505a is closed. Therefore, after the flat plate member 520 is retracted, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is conveyed by the flat plate member 520 and further moves on the flat plate member 520 as shown in FIGS. 62 (d) and 63 (d). Then, the ball enters the first passage entry port 504a on the back side. The game ball that has passed through the first passage entry port 504a operates the operating mechanism 511 to open the first non-electric accessory 415b.

The opening time in the short opening is shorter than the time required for the game ball on the flat plate member 520 to reach the second passage entry port 505a when the flat plate member 520 protrudes, and the opening time and opening in the short opening The closing time between the time and the time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball on the flat plate member 520 to reach the second passage entry port 505a when the flat plate member 520 protrudes.

According to the modified example 5 configured in this way, the game ball is mechanically moved to the first non-electric accessory 415b side or the second non-electric accessory 415c without using the distribution device 506 as in the present embodiment. Sorting becomes possible, and the sorting solenoid 121 used in the present embodiment can be omitted. Further, since the process of step S41 in FIG. 12 can be omitted, the control load of the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

According to the above-mentioned modification 5, the first non-electric accessory 415b is easy to open in the case of short opening, and the second non-electric accessory 415c is easy to open in the case of long opening. In the case of short opening, the second non-electric accessory 415c may be easily opened, and in the case of long opening, the first non-electric accessory 415b may be easily opened.

[Modification 6]
64 to 66 are views showing a main configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 6. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 6 is partially different in the configuration of the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment.

[Structure of winning unit 415]
The configuration of the main part of the winning unit 415 in the modification 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. The members having the same or the same function as the members constituting the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing a schematic configuration of the winning unit 415 in the modified example 6, FIG. 64 (a) is a plan view, FIG. 64 (b) is a side view of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 64 (c). Is a plan view showing the flow of the game ball in the long opening, and FIG. 64 (d) is a plan view showing the flow of the game ball in the short opening. FIG. 65 is a front view of the electric tulip 523 used in the winning unit 415 in the modified example 6, and FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 40 in which the electric tulip 523 is arranged.

The winning unit 415 in the sixth modification includes a first passage 504, a second passage 505, and an electric tulip 523. Comparing the winning unit 415 in the modified example 6 with the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment, the configuration of the first passage 504 and the second passage 505, the provision of the electric tulip 523, and the omission of the sorting device 506. Is different.

The first passage 504 of the modified example 6 is composed of a substantially square tubular member, and has a tip portion protruding from the board surface of the game board 40 and a center bent from this tip end side on the back surface side of the game board 40 and extending diagonally downward. A portion and a connecting portion formed at the lower end portion of the central portion and connected to the first operating mechanism 511 are provided. At the tip of the first passage 504, a first passage entry port 504b that is open upward is formed, and the tip (front surface) of the first passage 504 is closed. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first passage entry port 504a is guided to the first operating mechanism 511 through the first passage 504.

The second passage 505 of the modified example 6 is composed of a substantially square tubular member like the first passage 504, and is arranged on the back surface of the game board 40. A second passage entry port 505a is formed at the tip of the second passage 505 of the modified example 6, and the second passage entry port 505a is opened upward. Therefore, the game ball whose rolling path is changed to the back side of the game board 40 by the electric tulip 523 enters the second passage entrance 505a, passes through the second passage 505, and enters the second operating mechanism 513. Be guided.

As shown in FIG. 66, the electric tulip 523 is arranged directly below the ball passage detector 416 on the board surface of the game board 40 and directly above the first passage entry port 504a of the first passage 504.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the electric tulip 523 includes a pair of blade members 524, and the base end portion of the pair of blade members 524 is rotatably attached to drive a normal electric accessory solenoid 111. It rotates by doing. The electric tulip 523 is closed in an open state in which the pair of blade members 524 are separated from each other so that the game ball can enter, and the tips of the pair of blade members 524 are in contact with each other so that the game ball cannot enter. It can be switched to the state.

As shown in FIG. 64, plate-shaped guide plates 524a and 524a extending toward the game board 40 are formed at the base ends of the pair of blade members 524. When the electric tulip 523 is opened, the guide plates 524a and 524a are formed into a single plate shape in which the guide plates 524a and 524a are in contact with each other as shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 65 (b). , Functions as a guide for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 40. Further, when the electric tulip 523 is closed, as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 65 (c), the guide plates 524a and 524a are separated from each other, and the game is played between the pair of blade members 524 and 524. An opening is formed in which the ball can fall.

Therefore, the game ball on the pair of blade members 524 while the electric tulip 523 is open is guided to the back side of the game board 40 by the guide plates 524a and 524a and enters the second passage entry port 505b. Sphere. The second non-electric accessory 415c is released by sending the game ball that has entered the second passage entry port 505b to the second operating mechanism 513. Further, the game ball on the pair of blade members 524 just before the electric tulip 523 closes passes through the electric tulip 523 as it is and enters the first passage entry port 504b. The first non-electric accessory 415b is opened by sending the game ball that has entered the first passage entry port 504b to the first operating mechanism 511.

According to the modification 6, when the normal symbol game is won in the second short game state, the electric tulip 523 is opened only once for a relatively long time (hereinafter, referred to as long opening). When the normal symbol game is won in the first short game state, the electric tulip 523 is opened and closed for a short time (hereinafter referred to as short opening) a plurality of times. According to the modification 6, the opening time of the electric tulip 523 is set so that the game ball does not enter the electric tulip 523 at the end of the long opening.

In the second short game state, the game ball hit to the right during the long opening rides on the pair of blade members 524 as shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 65 (b), and is provided by the guide plates 524a and 524a. Guided by the back side of the game board 40, it enters the second passage entrance 505b to open the second non-electric accessory 415c. Then, at the end of the long opening, the electric tulip 523 is closed after the end of the predetermined time. At this time, if there is a game ball that enters the electric tulip 523 just before the electric tulip 523 closes, the game ball drops the electric tulip 523 and enters the first passage entrance 504b to enter the first passage. The non-electric accessory 415b is opened. In this way, there is a possibility that the first non-electric accessory 415b is opened in the second time saving game state.

In the first short game state, if a game ball hit right during a plurality of short releases enters the electric tulip 523, the game ball is as shown in FIGS. 64 (d) and 65 (c). By passing through the gap between the pair of blade members 524, the tulip falls from the electric tulip 523, enters the first passage entry port 504b, and opens the first non-electric accessory 415b.

According to the modified example 6 configured in this way, as in the modified example 5, the game ball is mechanically moved to the first non-electric accessory 415b side or the first non-electric accessory 415b side or the first non-electric accessory 415b side without using the distribution device 506 as in the present embodiment. 2 It becomes possible to distribute to the non-electric accessory 415c, and it becomes possible to omit the distribution solenoid 121 used in the present embodiment. Further, since the process of step S41 in FIG. 12 can be omitted, the control load of the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

According to the above-mentioned modification 6, the first non-electric accessory 415b can be easily opened in the case of short opening, and the second non-electric accessory 415c can be easily opened in the case of long opening. On the contrary, the second non-electric accessory 415c may be easily opened in the case of short opening, and the first non-electric accessory 415b may be easily opened in the case of long opening.

Although the present embodiment of the present invention and its modifications have been described above, the present embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, the second time-saving game state may be a so-called probabilistic state in which the winning probability of the special figure 2 lottery is changed to a high probability state.

Further, particularly, the second modification is applicable not only to a pachinko game machine in which one type and two types are mixed, but also to a so-called ST (special time) machine.

The ST machine is in a so-called RUSH state and a RUSH state, which enables a special symbol lottery to be a big hit with a high probability at a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) when a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery. It refers to a model in which the RUSH state continues if it becomes a big hit, and if it does not become a big hit, it shifts to a low probability state (normal game state).

The appearance of the pachinko game machine 1 referred to as the ST machine is the same as the appearance of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, but the accessory arranged on the board surface of the game board 40. The function of is partially different.

Specifically, the V winning opening 424 does not generate a V jackpot, but generates a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends by entering the V winning opening 424 during the jackpot game (that is,). (Continues the RUSH state) Functions as a probability fluctuation state operating port.

More specifically, when the special symbol stops at a specific symbol and becomes a big hit for 15 rounds, for example, in the 14th round, the attacker 421 is opened instead of opening the shutter 417. At this time, the movable member 426 is in an open state. Then, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 424 via the attacker 421, the movable member 426 is operated to close the V winning opening 424. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 424, the condition for continuing the RUSH state is satisfied. When the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 424, the game state shifts to, for example, a low-probability state and a time-saving game state having a predetermined number of fluctuations.

Other accessories, that is, the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b, the second starting port 414c, the winning unit 415, the ball passage detector 416, the shutter 417, the large winning opening 418, the general winning opening 419a to 419c, etc. , The same configuration and the same function as this embodiment.

Then, by executing the second time-saving game state in the second modification of the present embodiment in a high probability state, the player can play the game while expecting that the ST machine will be a big hit before the low probability state is reached. Will proceed. Even if the probability is low, the RUSH state will continue if a big hit is made and a V prize is won.

[Action and effect of this embodiment]
According to the present embodiment configured as described above, when the launched game ball is captured by the ordinary electric accessory 415a (flat plate member 520), the captured game ball is guided to the second passage 505. By notifying the launch timing that is likely to occur, the player is less likely to miss the launch timing that can open the second non-electric accessory 415c that is advantageous to him / her. In this way, it becomes possible for the player himself to provide the player with a new interest that he / she can acquire a state advantageous to himself / herself by operating the launching means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. become.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first non-electric accessory 415b, which is not advantageous to the player, is not advantageous to the player by stopping the firing of the game ball according to the effect of notifying that it is the timing to reach the first passage 504. It is possible to avoid leaving the open state, and it is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of time saving times.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the player fires the game ball according to the effect (navigation display 56) of notifying that it is the timing to reach the second passage 505, so that the second non-electricity is advantageous to the player. It becomes possible to open the accessory 415c.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the game ball is fired when the normal symbol display device 434 stops the normal symbol, the second non-electric accessory 415c which is advantageous to the player cannot be put into the first state. , The navigation display 56 makes it possible to make the player aware that the game ball is fired while the normal symbol is fluctuating. In addition, by performing an effect of notifying that it is the timing to reach the second passage 505 while the normal symbol is fluctuating, the player is made aware that the game ball is fired during this effect. Will be possible. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a new hobby that draws attention to ordinary symbols.

Further, according to the present embodiment, by driving the ordinary electric accessory 415a in a plurality of drive patterns, for example, the firing timing at which the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened changes. Therefore, it is possible to give variety to the effect (navigation display 56) for notifying the launch timing of the game ball.

Further, according to the present embodiment, if the player operates according to the effect by operating the launching device 20 with the hand operating the launching device 20 according to the game effect display 58 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. At the timing when the launched game ball is distributed to the first passage, the player is in a state of not operating the launching means. In this way, it is possible to avoid opening the first non-electric accessory 415b, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they merely exemplify specific examples and do not particularly limit the present invention. That is, the game machine of the present invention mainly divides the game media into a game board having a game area in which the game medium can roll, and a first area and a second area different from each other in the game area. A launching means capable of launching the game medium into the game area while adjusting the launch intensity of the game medium, a first starting area arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and the first area. The second starting area arranged on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game medium with respect to the first starting area, and either the game medium passing through the first starting area or the gaming medium passing through the second starting area. A big hit game state in which a special symbol is changed as an opportunity and a predetermined game value can be given to the player depending on the stop display mode of the special symbol, and a small hit game state in which a predetermined game value less than the big hit game state can be given. Identification information display means for notifying whether or not to shift to, game state control means for switching the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means, and capture of the game medium arranged in the first starting area. It is possible to switch between the first state where it is easy to capture the game medium and the second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium is guided to the first starting region. 1 The non-electric accessory can be switched between the first state, which is arranged in the second starting area and is easy to capture the game medium, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium, and is the first state. When the game medium is captured in, the second non-electric accessory that guides the game medium to the second starting region and the first non-electric accessory are switched to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the game medium. The first non-electric accessory switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media, and the second non-electric accessory is linked to the passage of the game medium. The second actuating mechanism that switches from the first state to the second state by switching the second non-electric accessory to the first state and capturing a predetermined number of game media, and the second in the first region. It is arranged on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game medium with respect to the starting area, is arranged in a passing area through which the game medium can pass, and between the passing area and the second starting area, and has passed through the passing area. It is in the second state when the electric accessory that can be switched between the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, and the game medium passes through the passing area. An electric combination that determines whether or not to switch the electric accessory to the first state. The object drive determination means, the distribution means for distributing the game medium captured by the electric accessory to either the first passage leading to the first operating mechanism or the second passage leading to the second operating mechanism, and the distribution. A distribution control means for controlling the distribution means, a special winning area arranged in the first area and a trigger for the game state control means to shift the game state to the jackpot game state when the game medium passes through, and the above-mentioned An effect means for performing various effects, such as a first state in which the game medium is driven in the small hit game state and the game medium opens the passage toward the special winning area, and an opening / closing accessory that can be switched to the second state in which the passage is closed. And the effect control means for controlling the effect means, and the game state control means is a game medium of a second big hit and the special winning area triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second start area. The game state after the end of the big hit game state shifted by the special big hit by passing is the normal game state in which the electric accessory drive determination means does not determine to switch the electric accessory to the first state, and the electric accessory drive determination. The first time-saving gaming state in which the means determines that the electric accessory is switched to the first state, and the distribution means distributes the first non-electric accessory so as to be in the first state, and the above. The second time saving that the electric accessory drive determining means determines that the electric accessory is switched to the first state is increased, and the distribution means distributes the second non-electric accessory to the first state. It has a game state setting means for setting one of the game states, and the game state setting means is a big hit game state shifted by the first big hit triggered by the entry of the game medium into the first start area. The gaming state after the end of is set to either the normal gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state, and the distribution control means is captured by the electric accessory in the second time-saving gaming state. Control is performed to drive the distribution means during the period of distributing the game medium to the second passage and the period of distribution to the first passage, and the effect control means is such that the game ball to be fired is the first passage. It is characterized in that the effect means is controlled so as to notify that it is the timing to reach the first passage during the period of distribution to the game board, the launch means, the first start area, and the like. 2nd starting area, identification information display means, gaming state control means, 1st non-electric accessory, 2nd non-electric accessory, 1st operating mechanism, 2nd operating mechanism, passing area, electric accessory, electric accessory drive Judgment means, distribution means, distribution control means The specific configurations of the special winning area, the opening / closing accessory, the effect means, the effect control means, the game state setting means, and the like can be appropriately redesigned.

[Appendix 1]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, there are types called digi-pachi and types called wing mono. In the past, there was a time when the types of pachinko gaming machines were stipulated in the Businesses Affecting Customs Law, and according to this, Digipachi falls under Type 1 and Feather Mono falls under Type 2.

In a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is notified to the player by the display means by changing and stopping the identification symbol and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, three-digit doublets such as "777"), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player. It shifts to the jackpot game state where it is possible.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a feather mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When the ball is entered into the open chucker, the blade member of the winning accessory is opened, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning accessory. Then, when the game ball on the blade member enters the winning accessory when the blade member opens, and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the winning accessory, the opening time of the blade member becomes longer. Then, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the winning accessory. A predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player according to the entry of the game balls into the winning prize.

Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a digital pachi and a blade mono, has appeared on the market. As a pachinko gaming machine of this type, those disclosed in Patent Document 1 have been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of a random number lottery triggered by the first starting mouth winning and the second starting mouth winning (so-called type 1 big hit), the first starting mouth winning and the second starting mouth winning As a result of the random number lottery triggered by the start opening prize, it is determined that it is a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game state, and the game ball on the blade member opened in the small hit game state is the V winning opening in the winning accessory. The pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the jackpot gaming state in the case of winning a prize (so-called two-kind jackpot) is disclosed.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting port (so-called navel) is arranged at the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly under the first starting port (so-called navel). The second starting port is located directly below. Further, a winning accessory having a V winning opening and a passing gate having a ball passing detection sensor are arranged in the right side region of the board surface. The second starting opening prize can be won only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passing gate. Therefore, in order to win a prize in the second starting opening, a so-called right-handed hit is performed by hitting the game ball into the right side region of the board surface.

Therefore, the player first hits the game ball into the left side region of the board, so-called left-handed hitting, aiming at winning the first starting opening. If a big hit is won with the first start opening winning, the electric tulip may shift to a time-saving game state in which the electric tulip is easy to open after the big hit game state ends. In the short-time game state, the player opens the electric tulip by hitting right and aims to win the second starting opening. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning as an opportunity, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If a player wins a V prize opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to a time-saving game state again after the jackpot game state ends, there is a possibility that the V prize opening will win a prize and become a big hit. By repeating the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state in this way, the player may be able to obtain more prize balls.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional digital pachi, when the game state is changed to a game state which is disadvantageous to the player after the big hit game state is finished (when the game state is not changed to the high probability state), for example, until the number of fluctuations of the identification symbol reaches 100 times. A type of model that employs a so-called electric tulip support that makes it easier to open the electric tulip is common.

However, in the above-mentioned one-kind and two-kind mixed pachinko game machine, the electric tulip that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is based on the technical standard that only one electric tulip can be arranged. There is no such accessory. For this reason, in the above-mentioned 1-type and 2-type mixed pachinko gaming machine, when the gaming state is changed to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game state is completed, there is no choice but to shift to the normal gaming state.

After the jackpot game state ends, the player shifts to the normal game state, which significantly reduces the motivation of the player to continue the game. Therefore, the game is often ended when the jackpot game state ends. In addition, the player may feel unsatisfactory in the game because there is no electric chew support that is often used in conventional digital pachis. In particular, when a normal big hit occurs in a high probability state, if there is no electric chew support after the big hit game state ends, there is a risk of feeling even more unsatisfactory.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one kind and two kinds are mixed.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (right-handed area) and a second area (right-handed area) that are different from each other in the game area. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium so as to hit the game medium in the left-handed area). ), A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a second starting area arranged in the first area through which the game medium can pass. (For example, the second starting port 414c) and the first, which can give a predetermined game value to the player, triggered by either the passing of the game medium in the first starting area or the passing of the game medium in the second starting area. A predetermined probability of whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) or a second special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that can give a predetermined gaming value less than that of the first special gaming state. (For example, the main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323 and S329 in FIG. 36) and the identification information display means (for example,) for notifying the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information. The special symbol display device 431), the game state control means for switching the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13), and the first start area are arranged. , It is possible to switch between the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium is used as the first state. A first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that leads to a starting region, a first state that is arranged in the second starting region and is easy to capture the game medium, and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium. A second displacement member (for example, a second non-electric accessory 415c) that can be switched to one of the states and guides the game medium to the second starting region when the game medium is captured in the first state. The first operation of switching the first displacement member to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the game medium and switching from the first state to the second state by the first displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media. The second displacement member is switched to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) and the game medium, and the second displacement member captures a predetermined number of game media. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches from the first state to the second state, and a passing region (for example, a ball passing detector 416) that is arranged in the first region and through which the game medium can pass. It is possible to switch between the first state, which is arranged in the first region and is easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passing region, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium, and is electrically operable. A predetermined probability of whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the third displacement member (for example, the flat plate member 520) and the passing region. (For example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26), the driving means for switching the third displacement member to the first state (for example, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), and the third displacement member. Displacement means (for example, a distribution device 506) for distributing the game medium captured by the vehicle to either the first passage leading to the first operating mechanism or the second passage leading to the second operating mechanism, and at least the second. A fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that is driven in a special gaming state and can be switched between a first state in which the game medium can be easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, and the first region. A special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that is arranged and passes through the gaming medium captured by the fourth displacement member to trigger the gaming state control means to shift the gaming state to the first special gaming state. The probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is such that the passage of the game medium in the first starting region is triggered by the passage of the gaming medium in the second starting region. It is set to a higher probability than when it is triggered (for example, the table of FIG. 7A), and the game state control means sets the game state after the end of the first special game state by the third displacement member. The first specific state (for example, the first time saving game state) in which the distribution means is likely to guide the game medium captured when the first state is switched to the first passage, and the third displacement member. The distribution means is less likely to lead to the first passage and is more likely to lead to the second passage than the first specific state, when the game medium captured when is switched to the first state. Two specific states (for example, a second time-saving game state) and a normal state in which the probability of determining that the third displacement member is switched to the first state by the drive determination means is lower than that of the first specific state and the two specific states. (For example, normal gaming state) The game state setting means (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24) is set to include, and the lottery means shifts with the passage of the game medium in the second starting area. The probability that the normal state will be reached after the determined first special gaming state ends and after the first special gaming state ends, which is executed when the special winning area is passed, is the probability of passing through the game medium in the first starting area. The transition is determined by the lottery means, which is smaller than the probability of becoming the normal state after the end of the first special gaming state, and the transition is determined by the lottery means when the game medium is passed through the second starting region. The probability of becoming the first specific state after the end of the first special gaming state and after the end of the first special gaming state executed with the passage of the special winning area is determined by passing through the game medium in the first starting area. It is characterized in that it is larger than the probability of becoming the first specific state after the end of the first special gaming state whose transition is determined by the lottery means (for example, the table of FIG. 7C).

According to the above configuration, the possibility of winning a prize in the special winning area (V winning opening 424) and shifting to the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state by two kinds of big hits (V jackpot)) is the first specific state ( Since the second specific state (second short game state) is higher than the first specific state (first short game state), the second specific state (second short game state) is higher than the first specific state (first short game state). Is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player advances the special game while expecting to shift to the second specific state (second time-saving game state) after the end of the first special game state.

Further, according to the above configuration, after the end of the first special game state triggered by the passage of the game medium to the second start area or the passage of the game medium to the special winning area, the first specific state (first time saving game state) is established. The probability of becoming the first specific state (first time-saving game state) is higher than the probability of becoming the first specific state (first time-saving game state) after the end of the first special game state that has shifted with the passage of the game medium to the first start area. Therefore, after the end of the first special gaming state, the game shifts to the first specific state (first time-saving game state) or the second specific state (second time-saving game state), and the game medium is in this specific state (time-saving game state). When the player passes through the special winning area and shifts to the first special gaming state (so-called continuous chan), the time is shortened even if the player does not enter the second time saving gaming state which is advantageous to the player after the end of the first special gaming state. The possibility of transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous than not granting the game, is higher than after the end of the first special gaming state. As a result, when the player shifts to the first specific state (first time-saving gaming state), the player continues the game while expecting the transition to the next special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine in which one kind and two kinds are mixed.

Further, according to the above configuration, the distribution means guides the game medium captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520) to the first passage and the second operating mechanism for guiding the game medium to the first operating mechanism. By allocating to any of the second passages, either the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) or the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state. As a result, it is possible to divide the game medium through the first starting area and the game medium passing through the second starting area while maintaining the technical standard that only one electric accessory can be arranged. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is arranged in the vicinity of the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) and can be opened and closed in the first special gaming state (for example, the fifth displacement member (for example). , Shutter 417) is further provided.

According to the above configuration, for example, in the first special game state, the game medium passes near the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c), so that it is assumed that the game medium is immediately before the first special game state or the first special game. Even if the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state) in the state, the game medium enters the second displacement member during the first special gaming state and is second. It becomes a state (closed state). This makes it difficult to leave the second displacement member in the first state (open state) after the end of the first special game, for example, when the normal game state is reached after the end of the first special game state. It is possible to prevent the game medium from passing through the second starting region, which is advantageous for the player, and leaving an opportunity to change from the second special gaming state (small hit) to the first special gaming state (V big hit). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the fairness of the game.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a hold control means for holding a predetermined number of triggers for the change of the identification information when the game medium passes through the first starting region during the change of the identification information. The identification information display means is characterized in that, when the game medium passes through the second starting region during the change of the identification information, the change of the identification information based on the passage of the game medium is not executed.

According to the above configuration, when the game medium passes through the second start area, the change of the identification information (for example, the special symbol) is not reserved, so that the second start area is set after the first and second special game states are completed. The change of the identification information based on the passage of the game medium is no longer executed. Therefore, after the jackpot game state ends, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) does not enter the first state due to fluctuation or stop of the identification information, and the normal state or the first specific state after the end of the special game state. When the state is changed, it is possible to prevent the game medium from leaving a state in which it can pass through the second starting region. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the fairness of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine in which one type and two types are mixed, which can improve the interest of the game in the one type and two type mixed pachinko game machine.

[Appendix 2]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during the small hit game, the blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens the open / close region, and the game ball enters the open / close region. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. As the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

In the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. When a ball is hit, a random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The display means fluctuates and stops the identification symbol, and the game is played according to the stop display mode of the identification symbol. It is to notify the person.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since a big hit or a small hit is triggered by a start opening prize, many players mainly pay attention to whether or not to win the start opening prize. However, the movement of the attacker that guides the game ball to the V winning opening is less noticeable because the movement frequency is low, and it may not even be noticed that the attacker has moved. In particular, in the short-time game state, since the time from the start opening winning to the V winning via the small hit is short, the big hit is suddenly notified before confirming the operation of the attacker, and as a result, it is not noticed. Often.

Therefore, the player hits the game ball into the area where the V winning opening is arranged during the time-saving game, confirms the starting prize while looking at the vicinity of the electric tulip, and notifies that the game ball has won the V winning opening. The number of time reductions will be exhausted indiscriminately, hoping that the production will occur or that the identification information will be gathered and become a big hit. As described above, conventionally, it has been difficult to give a player a special interest in a short-time game state.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (right-handed area) and a second area (right-handed area) that are different from each other in the game area. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium so as to hit the game medium (for example, a game ball) into the left-handed area). ), A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a second starting area arranged in the first area through which the game medium can pass. (For example, a special game capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player by using either the second starting port 414c), the passing of the game medium in the first starting area, or the passing of the game medium in the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323, S329 in FIG. 36) for determining whether or not to shift to a state (for example, a big hit game state and a small hit game state) with a predetermined probability. Identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and game state control that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. Either the means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) and the first state, which is arranged in the first starting area and is easy to capture the game medium, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium. It is switchable, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the first displacement member (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area and the second starting area. It is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture. When the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium is used as described above. The first displacement member is switched to the first state and the first displacement member is linked with the passage of the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) leading to the second starting region and the game medium. A first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media, and the second displacement member in conjunction with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches from the first state to the second state by switching to the first state and the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media. A passage region (for example, a ball passage detector 416) arranged in the first region and through which the game medium can pass, and a first first region arranged in the first region and passing through the passage region can be easily captured. A third displacement member (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched between a state and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and is electrically operable, and the game medium has passed through the passing region. A drive determination means (for example, main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) for determining whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state with a predetermined probability, and the third state. A driving means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), a first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first actuating mechanism, and the second actuating mechanism. The lottery by the lottery means, which is provided with a distribution means (for example, a distribution device 506) that distributes to any of the second passages leading to the above, and is triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second start area, is the first start. It is more advantageous than the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium in the area, and the game state control means sets the game state after the end of the special game state as the game state after the end of the special game state. When one lottery by means is regarded as one game and the third displacement member is switched to the first state during a predetermined first number of games (for example, the number of time reductions in the second time saving game state). After executing the second specific state (for example, the second time-saving game state) in which the distribution means is likely to guide the captured game medium to the second passage, and executing the game of the first number of games in advance. The distribution means said that the distribution means captured the game medium captured when the third displacement member was switched to the first state during the predetermined second game number (for example, the time reduction number in the first time reduction game state). It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a special gaming state (table of FIG. 53) that executes a first specific state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) that is more likely to lead to one passage than the second specific state. A game machine to play.

According to the above configuration, when the special game state (for example, the time-saving game state) is executed after the end of the special game state, the game is first played during the first game number (for example, the time-saving number of times in the second time-saving game state). A second specific state (for example, a second time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then a first that is disadvantageous to the player during the second game count (for example, the time-saving number of times in the first time-saving game state). A specific state (for example, the first time saving game state) is executed. For this reason, it is most desirable for the player to shift to the special gaming state in the second specific state, but even if the transition from the second specific state to the first specific state is performed, the drive determination means moves the third displacement member. If the determination to switch to the first state is made, the possibility that the first displacement member will be in the first state and the game medium will pass through the first starting region will increase, and the lottery by the lottery means will be facilitated. As a result, when the player shifts to the first specific state (first time-saving gaming state), the player continues the game while expecting the transition to the next special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the special gaming state is less than the first special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) and the first special gaming state in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value. A first state and a game medium that include a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) that can be given a predetermined game value, are driven in at least the second special game state, and are easy to capture the game medium. The gaming state is caused by the passage of a fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that can be switched to a second state in which it is difficult to perform, and a game medium arranged in the first region and captured by the fourth displacement member. The control means further includes a special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that triggers the transition of the gaming state to the first special gaming state, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is , The case where the passage of the game medium in the second starting area is triggered is set to a higher probability than the case where the passage of the game medium in the first starting area is triggered, and the game state control means is the special After the game state after the end of the first special game state executed with the passage of the game medium in the winning area is completed, after the end of the first special game state triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second start area. It is characterized by switching in the same manner as above.

According to the above configuration, the latter half of the special gaming state is more likely to shift to the first specific state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, conventionally, it has been executed depending on the model in the 1st and 2nd class mixers. When a special method called V removal is performed, there is a high possibility that the first game number in the second specific state, which is advantageous for the player, is wasted, and the merit of V removal is lost. Therefore, it is possible to prevent V removal.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is a plurality of games in which the second game count and the first game count are distributed so that the sum of the second game count and the first game count becomes a constant value. It is characterized in that the game number determination means for determining the second game number and the first game number is further provided from the selection pattern of.

According to the above configuration, for example, when the number of games in the special game state is 100, the number of first games is 20 and the number of second games is 80, the number of first games is 80 and the number of second games is 80. Various patterns can be set, such as 20 times. As a result, the player pays attention to how many times the first game is, which is advantageous for the player, and it becomes possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

[Appendix 3]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during the small hit game, the blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens the open / close region, and the game ball enters the open / close region. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. As the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

In the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. When a ball is hit, a random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The display means fluctuates and stops the identification symbol, and the game is played according to the stop display mode of the identification symbol. It is to notify the person.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since a big hit or a small hit is triggered by a start opening prize, many players mainly pay attention to whether or not to win the start opening prize. However, the movement of the attacker that guides the game ball to the V winning opening is less noticeable because the movement frequency is low, and it may not even be noticed that the attacker has moved. In particular, in the short-time game state, since the time from the start opening winning to the V winning via the small hit is short, the big hit is suddenly notified before confirming the operation of the attacker, and as a result, it is not noticed. Often.

Therefore, the player hits the game ball into the area where the V winning opening is arranged during the time-saving game, confirms the starting prize while looking at the vicinity of the electric tulip, and notifies that the game ball has won the V winning opening. The number of time reductions will be exhausted indiscriminately, hoping that the production will occur or that the identification information will be gathered and become a big hit. As described above, conventionally, it has been difficult to give a player a special interest in a short-time game state.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (right-handed area) and a second area (right-handed area) that are different from each other in the game area. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium so as to hit the game medium (for example, a game ball) into the left-handed area). ), A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a second starting area arranged in the first area through which the game medium can pass. (For example, a special game capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player by using either the second starting port 414c), the passing of the game medium in the first starting area, or the passing of the game medium in the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323, S329 in FIG. 36) for determining whether or not to shift to a state (for example, a big hit game state and a small hit game state) with a predetermined probability. Identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and game state control that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. Either the means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) and the first state, which is arranged in the first starting area and is easy to capture the game medium, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium. It is switchable, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the first displacement member (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area and the second starting area. It is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture. When the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium is used as described above. The first displacement member is switched to the first state and the first displacement member is linked with the passage of the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) leading to the second starting region and the game medium. A first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media, and the second displacement member in conjunction with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches from the first state to the second state by switching to the first state and the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media. A passing region (for example, a ball passage detector 416) arranged in the first region and through which the game medium can pass, and a first first region arranged in the first region and easily capturing the game medium passing through the passing region. A third displacement member (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched between a state and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and is electrically operable, and the game medium has passed through the passing region. A drive determination means (for example, main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) for determining whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state with a predetermined probability, and the third state. A drive means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), a first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first actuating mechanism, and the second actuating mechanism. The game state control means includes a distribution means (for example, a distribution device 506) for distributing to any of the second passages leading to, and the game state control means sets the game state after the end of the special game state to the third displacement member. The first specific state (for example, the first time saving game state) in which the distribution means is likely to lead the game medium captured when is switched to the first state to the first passage, and the third displacement. The possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured when the member is switched to the first state to the first passage is lower than that of the first specific state, and it is more likely to lead to the second passage. The probability of determining that the third displacement member is switched to the first state by the drive determining means is lower than that of the second specific state (for example, the second time-saving game state) and the first specific state and the second specific state. It has a game state setting means (for example, a main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24) for setting a state (for example, a normal game state), and a first start area of the second area. The game state after the end of the special game state executed with the passage of the game medium and the game state after the end of the special game state executed with the passage of the game medium in the first start area of the first area. The probability of transitioning to the normal state is the same, and the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state executed with the passage of the game medium in the first starting area of the second region and the first start of the first region are the same. The probability of transitioning to the second specific state in the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state executed with the passage of the game medium in the area is triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area of the first area. That is higher (Table of FIG. 54).

According to the above configuration, the special game is performed in the first specific state (for example, the first time saving game state) in which the first displacement member (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b) is likely to be in the first state (for example, the open state). When the state is changed, the second displacement member (for example, the second non-displacement member) is more than the first specific state after the end of the special game state than when the special game state is changed in the normal state (for example, the normal game state). Since there is a high possibility that the electric accessory 415c) will shift to the second specific state (for example, the second time-saving gaming state) in which the first state (for example, the open state) is likely to occur, the first specific state (for example, the first state) is likely to occur. It is possible to improve the interest in the time-saving game state). In this way, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention controls the effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 50) that performs various effects and the effect means, and ends the special game state during the special game state. Further provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201, steps S1071 to S1076 in FIG. 55) for performing a notification effect for notifying the subsequent game state, the notification effect shifts to the normal state as a result of the effect. It is characterized in that there are three patterns of an effect of notifying the transition to the first specific state, an effect of notifying the transition to the first specific state, and an effect of notifying the transition to the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, before the end of the special gaming state, the gaming states after the end of the special gaming state are the normal state (normal gaming state), the first specific state (first time-saving gaming state), and the first specific state (second). Since it is notified which of the time-saving game states), it is possible to give the player an interest in the production during the special game.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the game state setting means sets the game state after the end of the special game state, which has been shifted upon passing through the game medium in the second start region, to the normal state and the first state. 2 The probability of shifting to the normal state after the end of the special gaming state triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second starting area by setting to one of the specific states is triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area. The probability of shifting to the normal state after the end of the special gaming state is the same as the probability of shifting to the second specific state triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second starting region. It is higher than the probability of transitioning to the second specific state after the end of the special gaming state triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting region in the normal state or the first specific state (Special Figure 1 (non-time reduction, FIG. It is characterized by time reduction 1 or time reduction 2) and 15R time reduction 2) in the special figure 2 (non-time reduction, time reduction 1 or time reduction 2).

According to the above configuration, when the game shifts to the special gaming state in the second specific state (second time saving game state), the probability of returning to the second specific state (second time saving game state) after the end of the special gaming state is the normal game. Since it is higher than the case where the state or the first time-saving game state is changed to the special game state, the second specific state (second time-saving game state) and the special game state can be easily repeated. As described above, the second specific state (second time saving game state) is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state (first time saving game state).

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix 4]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, there are types called digi-pachi and types called wing mono. In the past, there was a time when the types of pachinko gaming machines were stipulated in the Businesses Affecting Customs Law, and according to this, Digipachi falls under Type 1 and Feather Mono falls under Type 2.

In a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is notified to the player by the display means by changing and stopping the identification symbol and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, three-digit doublets such as "777"), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player. It shifts to the jackpot game state where it is possible.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a feather mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the open chucker, the blade member of the winning accessory opens, and the gaming ball can enter the winning accessory. Then, when the game ball placed on the blade member enters the winning accessory when the blade member is opened, and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the winning accessory, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. Then, the game shifts to a big hit game state in which it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the electric accessory. A predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player according to the entry of the game balls into the winning prize.

Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a digital pachi and a blade mono, has appeared on the market. As a pachinko gaming machine of this type, those disclosed in Patent Document 1 have been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, when the result of the random number lottery triggered by the first start opening prize and the second start opening prize is determined to be a big hit (so-called type 1 big hit), the second start opening prize is a trigger. When the game ball shifts to the small hit game state according to the result of the random number lottery, and the game ball placed on the blade member opened in the small hit game state wins the V winning opening in the winning prize (so-called two-kind big hit). Discloses a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting port (so-called navel) is arranged at the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly under the first starting port (so-called navel). The second starting port is located directly below. Further, a winning accessory having a V winning opening and a passing gate having a ball passing detection sensor are arranged in the right side region of the board surface. The second starting opening prize can be won only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passing gate. Therefore, in order to win a prize in the second starting opening, a so-called right-handed hit is performed by hitting the game ball into the right side region of the board surface.

Therefore, the player first hits the game ball into the left side region of the board, so-called left-handed hitting, aiming at winning the first starting opening. If a big hit is won with the first start opening winning, the electric tulip may shift to a time-saving game state in which the electric tulip is easy to open after the big hit game state ends. In the short-time game state, the player opens the opening of the electric tulip by hitting right and aims at winning the second starting opening. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning as an opportunity, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If a player wins a V prize opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to a time-saving game state again after the jackpot game state ends, there is a possibility that the V prize opening will win a prize and become a big hit. By repeating the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state in this way, the player may be able to obtain more prize balls.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the time-saving gaming state of the above-mentioned one-type and two-type mixed pachinko game machine, since the fluctuation time of the identification symbol is short, the time from the small hit to the V prize is shortened, and as a result, the big hit suddenly occurs. I have a strong impression. For this reason, it is difficult to provide the player with a production that raises the expectation of becoming a big hit, as compared with a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi.

In addition, a player who plays a pachinko game machine in which one type and two types are mixed hits a game ball into the area where the V winning opening is arranged in a time-saving game state, and notifies that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening. There is a tendency to inadvertently digest the number of time reductions while expecting the occurrence of the production. As described above, it has been difficult to give a special interest to a player who plays a pachinko machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem, and in particular, to improve the interest of a game in a pachinko machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention has a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area (for example, a game area 41) on which the game medium can roll, and a game in the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a medium (for example, a game ball) and a first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass. ), A second starting area (for example, a second starting port 414c) arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass, passing the game medium in the first starting area, and passing the game medium in the second starting area. A first special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a player can be given a predetermined game value, and a second special state in which a predetermined game value less than the first special game state can be given, triggered by any of the above. Lottery means for determining with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to a special gaming state including a gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323 and S329 in FIG. 36). And the identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. The state control means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13), the passage area arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass (for example, the ball passage detector 416), and the game area are arranged. A first displacement member that can be switched between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passing region and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and is electrically operable (for example, an ordinary electric combination). A drive determination means (for example,) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the first displacement member in the second state to the first state, triggered by the passage of the object 415a) and the passing region by the game medium. , Main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26), a driving means for switching the first displacement member to the first state (for example, a normal electric accessory solenoid 111), and a game medium driven by at least in the second special gaming state. A second displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that can switch between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and a second displacement member control that controls the second displacement member. Means (for example, main CPU 101, steps S65 to 67 in FIG. 13) and the game area are arranged and captured by the second displacement member. With the special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that triggers the gaming state control means to shift the gaming state to the first special gaming state (for example, V jackpot gaming state) by passing through the game medium. When the second displacement member control means shifts to the second special gaming state, the second displacement member wins a prize in the special winning area between the first state and the second state. Displacement control can be executed based on one of a plurality of predetermined displacement modes (small hit opening patterns a to c in FIG. 60) having different rates, and one displacement from the plurality of types of displacement modes. The displacement mode determining means for determining the mode (for example, the main CPU 101, step S135 in FIG. 18) is further provided, and the displacement mode determining means is the identification information that triggered the transition to the gaming state for determining the displacement mode. It is characterized in that the displacement mode can be determined based on the stop display mode of the display means.

According to the above configuration, there are a plurality of types of displacement modes of the second displacement member (for example, attacker 421) in the second special gaming state (small hit game state), and the winning rate to the special winning area differs for each displacement mode. There is. Further, the displacement mode of the second displacement member is determined by the stop display mode of the identification information display means that triggered the second special gaming state (small hit gaming state). As described above, since the displacement mode of the second displacement member is not constant, the player becomes interested in the displacement mode of the second displacement member, and the game medium passes through the second displacement member. You will see the displacement of the second displacement member while expecting. In this way, it is possible to give the player a new interest.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the stop display mode of the identification information display means is a plurality of second stops for notifying that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition to the second special gaming state. A plurality of types of predetermined displacement modes are associated with any of the plurality of second stop display modes, including display modes (small hit symbols 1-3 in FIG. 59 (d)) (eg,). In FIG. 59 (d), the open pattern a and the open pattern c are associated with the small hit symbol 1), the displacement mode determining means is the second stop display displayed by the identification information display means. It is characterized in that the displacement mode is determined based on the mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set at least the number of displacement modes of the second displacement member in the number of the second stop display modes, and it is possible to diversify the displacement modes of the second displacement member. In this way, it is possible to give the player a new interest.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention can be switched between a first state that allows the passage of the game medium through the special winning area and a second state that restricts the passage of the game medium through the special winning area. Regulatory accessory (for example, movable member 426) and regulatory accessory control means (for example, main CPU 101,) that controls driving the regulated accessory in a certain pattern when the state shifts to the second special gaming state. It is characterized in that step S306) of FIG. 34 is further provided.

According to the above configuration, the difficulty level of the game ball passing through the special winning area differs depending on the combination of the displacement mode of the second displacement member and the drive pattern of the regulating accessory. Here, since the regulating accessory has a constant drive pattern, the difficulty level of passing the game medium to the special winning area is substantially determined by the displacement mode of the second displacement member. That is, if the displacement mode has a high winning rate to the special winning area, the passing difficulty level is low, and if the displacement mode has a low winning rate to the special winning area, the passing difficulty level is high. Therefore, for example, if the time to be in the first state is long but it is difficult to win in the special winning area, or if the time to be in the first state is short but the game medium passes through the second displacement member, there is a high probability of special winning. It is possible to create various patterns such as patterns that win prizes in the area. As a result, even if the game medium passes through the second displacement member, the player does not necessarily pass through the special winning area, so that the player looks around the second displacement member while expecting to pass through the special winning area. Become. In this way, it is possible to give the player a new interest.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, a plurality of the displacement modes are associated with one second stop display mode, and a plurality of displacement modes are associated with each of the plurality of second stop display modes. The displacement modes of the above include combinations having different winning rates (for example, in FIG. 59 (d), an opening pattern a having a high difficulty level and an opening pattern having a low difficulty level with respect to the small hit symbol 1). The game state control means first determines the game state after the end of the first special game state, and the first displacement member in which the drive determination means is in the second state. A game state setting that includes a specific state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which a decision to switch to a state is made with a high probability and a normal state (for example, a normal game state) in which the decision is made with a low probability. The main CPU 101 has means (for example, steps S214 to S219 of FIG. 24), and in the specific state, the identification information display means displays the second stop display mode, and the displacement mode determining means displays the second stop display mode. When determining the displacement mode based on the stop display mode, the first specific state in which there is a high possibility of selecting the displacement mode having a low winning rate among the plurality of displacement modes associated with the second stop display mode (the first specific state ( It is characterized by including a first time-saving game state) and a second specific state (second time-saving game state) in which there is a high possibility of selecting the displacement mode having a high winning rate.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific state (first time-saving game state), the second specific state (second time-saving game state), and the normal state (for example, the normal game state) are compared, the game medium is special. The second specific state, which is likely to pass through the winning area, is the most advantageous for the player, followed by the first specific state and the normal state. Here, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state is the first specific state or the second specific state only by the displacement mode of the second displacement member. Therefore, during the period of the specific state, it is possible to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation for the occurrence of the first special game state due to the passage of the special winning area of the game medium.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a pachinko machine that is a mixture of one type and two types.

[Appendix 5]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, there are types called digi-pachi and types called wing mono. In the past, there was a time when the types of pachinko gaming machines were stipulated in the Businesses Affecting Customs Law, and according to this, Digipachi falls under Type 1 and Feather Mono falls under Type 2.

In a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is notified to the player by the display means by changing and stopping the identification symbol and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, three-digit doublets such as "777"), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player. It shifts to the jackpot game state where it is possible.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a feather mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the open chucker, the blade member of the winning accessory opens, and the gaming ball can enter the winning accessory. Then, when the game ball placed on the blade member enters the winning accessory when the blade member is opened, and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the winning accessory, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. Then, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the winning accessory. A predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player according to the entry of the game balls into the winning prize.

Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a digital pachi and a blade mono, has appeared on the market. As a pachinko gaming machine of this type, those disclosed in Patent Document 1 have been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of a random number lottery triggered by the first starting opening prize and the second starting opening winning (so-called type 1 big hit), the second starting opening winning is triggered. As a result of the random number lottery, it is determined that it is a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game state, and the game ball placed on the blade member opened in the small hit game state wins the V winning opening in the winning accessory (so-called). The pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the jackpot gaming state is disclosed in (2 types of jackpot).

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting port (so-called navel) is arranged at the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly under the first starting port (so-called navel). The second starting port is located directly below. Further, a winning accessory having a V winning opening and a passing gate having a ball passing detection sensor are arranged in the right side region of the board surface. The second starting opening prize can be won only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passing gate. Therefore, in order to win a prize in the second starting opening, a so-called right-handed hit is performed by hitting the game ball into the right side region of the board surface.

Therefore, the player first hits the game ball into the left side region of the board, so-called left-handed hitting, aiming at winning the first starting opening. If a big hit is won with the first start opening winning, the electric tulip may shift to a time-saving game state in which the electric tulip is easy to open after the big hit game state ends. In the short-time game state, the player opens the electric tulip by hitting right and aims to win the second starting opening. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning as an opportunity, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If a player wins a V prize opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to a time-saving game state again after the jackpot game state ends, there is a possibility that the V prize opening will win a prize and become a big hit. By repeating the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state in this way, the player may be able to obtain more prize balls.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional digital pachi, when the game state is changed to a game state which is disadvantageous to the player after the big hit game state is finished (when the game state is not changed to the high probability state), for example, until the number of fluctuations of the identification symbol reaches 100 times. A type of model that employs a so-called electric tulip support that makes it easier to open the electric tulip is common.
However, in the above-mentioned one-type and two-type mixed pachinko game machine, an accessory such as an electric tulip that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first starting port is not arranged. For this reason, in the above-mentioned 1-type and 2-type mixed pachinko gaming machine, when the gaming state is changed to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game state is completed, there is no choice but to shift to the normal gaming state.

After the jackpot game state ends, the player shifts to the normal game state, which significantly reduces the motivation of the player to continue the game. Therefore, the game is often ended when the jackpot game state ends. In addition, the player may feel unsatisfactory in the game because there is no electric chew support that is often used in conventional digital pachis.

Regarding this problem, it is conceivable to arrange an accessory such as an electric tulip with respect to the first starting port. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a driving device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a driving device for an electric tulip. However, as the number of electric solenoids increases, not only the cost increases, but also a mechanism for releasing the heat generated from the electric solenoid is required.

Therefore, as an accessory to be placed at the first start port or the second start port, a tulip that mechanically opens and closes in conjunction with the rolling of the game ball instead of the electric tulip, a so-called non-electric accessory called a mechanical chew. It is conceivable to adopt.

However, the adoption of a mechanical chew may be a target of fraudulent acts such as forcibly opening the tulip blade members from the outside using special equipment to make it easier for the game ball to enter.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory that can prevent fraudulent activities.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (right-handed area) and a second area (right-handed area) that are different from each other in the game area. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium so as to hit the game medium in the left-handed area). ), A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a second starting area arranged in the first area through which the game medium can pass. (For example, a special game that can give a predetermined game value to a player by using either (for example, the second start port 414c), the game medium passing through the first starting area, or the game medium passing through the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323, S329 in FIG. 36) that determines whether or not to shift to a state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state) with a predetermined probability. An identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game state control that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. Either the means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) and the first state, which is arranged in the first starting area and is easy to capture the game medium, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium. It is switchable, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the first displacement member (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area and the second starting area. It is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture. When the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium is used as described above. The first displacement member is switched to the first state and the first displacement member is linked with the passage of the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) leading to the second starting region and the game medium. A first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media, and the second displacement member in conjunction with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches from the first state to the second state by switching to the first state and the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media, and a front A passage region (for example, a ball passage detector 416) arranged in the first region and through which the game medium can pass, and a first region arranged in the first region and easily capturing the game medium passing through the passage region. A third displacement member (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched between a state and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and that the game medium has passed through the passing region. A drive determination means (for example, main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) for determining whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, and the third A driving means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), a first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first actuating mechanism, and the second actuating mechanism. Displacement means (for example, a distribution device 506) that distributes to any of the second passages leading to the above, and at least one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member or the first displacement member. Error detection is performed based on a detection sensor (for example, photosensors 508 and 509) capable of detecting that the second displacement member has operated to reach an open degree capable of capturing the game medium, and the detection result of the detection sensor. The game state control means includes a feasible error detecting means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S42 in FIG. 12), and the third displacement member first determines the game state after the end of the special game state. The first specific state (for example, the first time-saving game state) in which the distribution means is likely to guide the game medium captured when the state is switched to the first passage, and the third displacement member are the first. The second specific state in which the distribution means is less likely to lead the game medium captured when switched to the first state to the first passage and is more likely to lead to the second passage than in the first specific state. A state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state) and a normal state (for example, a normal state in which the probability of determining that the third displacement member is switched to the first state by the drive determination means is lower than that of the first specific state and the second specific state (for example). For example, it is characterized by having a game state setting means (for example, a main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24) to be set to any one including (normal game state).

According to the above configuration, for example, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) are in the first state even though the game is not performed. When there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed, such as when the blade members 510 and 512 are in the open state, an error signal is output from the detection sensor to prevent fraudulent activity. It will be possible to deal with it quickly. Further, for example, before the end of the time-saving game state, the first displacement member or the second displacement member is set to the first state, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state after the time-saving game state ends while maintaining this first state. Then, even if the game medium is inserted into the first displacement member or the second displacement member in the first state at an arbitrary timing in the normal game state, an error signal is output from the detection sensor, so that the error signal is output. For example, by executing the notification effect, the player is forced to insert the game medium into the non-electric accessory as soon as possible.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are blade members (for example,) that can switch between an open state in which the game medium can be captured and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be captured. Each of the blade members 510 and 512) is provided, and the detection sensor is characterized in that it outputs a detection signal when the blade member has an open degree of half or more of the diameter of the game medium.

According to the above configuration, for example, the blade members (blade members 510, 512) of the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) are forcibly opened. When an act is performed, an error signal is output before the blade member is fully opened. This makes it possible to quickly deal with fraudulent activities.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the special gaming state is a first special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value, and a predetermined gaming value less than that of the first special gaming state. A first state in which the game medium can be easily captured and a first state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) to which the game medium can be assigned and driven in at least the second special game state. The game state control means is played by passing a fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that can be switched between the two states and a game medium arranged in the first region and captured by the fourth displacement member. A special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that triggers the transition of the state to the first special gaming state is further provided, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is the second. The case where the passage of the game medium in the starting area is triggered is set to a higher probability than the case where the passage of the game medium in the first starting area is triggered, and the game state control means is a game in the special winning area. The gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state executed with the passage of the medium is switched in the same manner as after the end of the first special gaming state triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area. It is characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine in which a fraudulent act of prying open a second displacement member is unlikely to occur in a type 1 type 2 mixer.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory that can prevent fraudulent activities.

[Appendix 6]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, there are types called digi-pachi and types called wing mono. In the past, there was a time when the types of pachinko gaming machines were stipulated in the Businesses Affecting Customs Law, and according to this, Digipachi falls under Type 1 and Feather Mono falls under Type 2.

In a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is notified to the player by the display means by changing and stopping the identification symbol and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, three-digit doublets such as "777"), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player. It shifts to the jackpot game state where it is possible.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a feather mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the open chucker, the blade member of the winning accessory opens, and the gaming ball can enter the winning accessory. Then, when the game ball placed on the blade member enters the winning accessory when the blade member is opened, and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the winning accessory, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. Then, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the winning accessory. A predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player according to the entry of the game balls into the winning prize.

Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a digital pachi and a blade mono, has appeared on the market. As a pachinko gaming machine of this type, those disclosed in Patent Document 1 have been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of a random number lottery triggered by the first starting opening prize and the second starting opening winning (so-called type 1 big hit), the second starting opening winning is triggered. As a result of the random number lottery, it is determined that it is a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game state, and the game ball placed on the blade member opened in the small hit game state wins the V winning opening in the winning accessory (so-called). The pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the jackpot gaming state is disclosed in (2 types of jackpot).

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting port (so-called navel) is arranged at the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly under the first starting port (so-called navel). The second starting port is located directly below. Further, a winning accessory having a V winning opening and a passing gate having a ball passing detection sensor are arranged in the right side region of the board surface. The second starting opening prize can be won only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passing gate. Therefore, in order to win a prize in the second starting opening, a so-called right-handed hit is performed by hitting the game ball into the right side region of the board surface.

Therefore, the player first hits the game ball into the left side region of the board, so-called left-handed hitting, aiming at winning the first starting opening. If a big hit is won with the first start opening winning, the electric tulip may shift to a time-saving game state in which the electric tulip is easy to open after the big hit game state ends. In the short-time game state, the player opens the electric tulip by hitting right and aims to win the second starting opening. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning as an opportunity, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If a player wins a V prize opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to a time-saving game state again after the jackpot game state ends, there is a possibility that the V prize opening will win a prize and become a big hit. By repeating the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state in this way, the player may be able to obtain more prize balls.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional digital pachi, when the game state is changed to a game state which is disadvantageous to the player after the big hit game state is finished (when the game state is not changed to the high probability state), for example, until the number of fluctuations of the identification symbol reaches 100 times. A type of model that employs a so-called electric tulip support that makes it easier to open the electric tulip is common.
However, in the above-mentioned one-type and two-type mixed pachinko game machine, an accessory such as an electric tulip that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first starting port is not arranged. For this reason, in the above-mentioned 1-type and 2-type mixed pachinko gaming machine, when the gaming state is changed to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game state is completed, there is no choice but to shift to the normal gaming state.

After the jackpot game state ends, the player shifts to the normal game state, which significantly reduces the motivation of the player to continue the game. Therefore, the game is often ended when the jackpot game state ends. In addition, the player may feel unsatisfactory in the game because there is no electric chew support that is often used in conventional digital pachis.

Regarding this problem, it is conceivable to arrange an accessory such as an electric tulip with respect to the first starting port. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a driving device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a driving device for an electric tulip. However, as the number of electric solenoids increases, not only the cost increases, but also a mechanism for releasing the heat generated from the electric solenoid is required. Therefore, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids as much as possible.

Therefore, as an accessory to be placed at the first start port or the second start port, a tulip that mechanically opens and closes in conjunction with the rolling of the game ball instead of the electric tulip, a so-called non-electric accessory called a mechanical chew. It is conceivable to adopt.

However, the adoption of a mechanical chew may be a target of fraudulent acts such as forcibly opening the tulip blade members from the outside using special equipment to make it easier for the game ball to enter.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory that can prevent fraudulent activities.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (right-handed area) and a second area (right-handed area) that are different from each other in the game area. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium so as to hit the game medium in the left-handed area). ), A first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a second starting area arranged in the first area through which the game medium can pass. (For example, a special game that can give a predetermined game value to a player by using either (for example, the second start port 414c), the game medium passing through the first starting area, or the game medium passing through the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, steps S323, S329 in FIG. 36) that determines whether or not to shift to a state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state) with a predetermined probability. An identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game state control that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. Either the means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) and the first state, which is arranged in the first starting area and is easy to capture the game medium, and the second state, which is difficult to capture the game medium. It is switchable, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the first displacement member (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area and the second starting area. It is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture. When the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium is used as described above. The first displacement member is switched to the first state and the first displacement member is linked with the passage of the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) leading to the second starting region and the game medium. A first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media, and the second displacement member in conjunction with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches from the first state to the second state by switching to the first state and the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media, and a front A passage region (for example, a ball passage detector 416) arranged in the first region and through which the game medium can pass, and a first region arranged in the first region and easily capturing the game medium passing through the passage region. A third displacement member (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched between a state and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and that the game medium has passed through the passing region. A drive determination means (for example, main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) for determining whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state with a predetermined probability, and the third state. A driving means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), a first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first actuating mechanism, and the second actuating mechanism. Displacement means (for example, a distribution device 506) that distributes to any of the second passages leading to the above, and at least one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member or the first displacement member. An openness detection sensor (for example, photosensors 508 and 509) capable of detecting that the second displacement member has reached an open degree capable of capturing the game medium and the game medium have passed through the first starting region. A first pass detection sensor (for example, a first start opening winning ball sensor 116b) for detecting the displacement, and a second pass detection sensor (for example, a second start opening winning ball sensor 116b) for detecting that the game medium has passed through the second start region. The game state control means includes a ball sensor 116c) and an error detection means (for example, main CPU 101, step S42 in FIG. 12) capable of executing error detection based on the detection result of the open detection sensor. There is a high possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured when the third displacement member is switched to the first state to the first passage by the game state after the end of the special game state. The possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured when the specific state (for example, the first time-saving gaming state) and the third displacement member is switched to the first state to the first passage is said. By the second specific state (for example, the second time saving game state) which is lower than the first specific state and is likely to lead to the second passage, and by the drive determination means than the first specific state and the second specific state. A gaming state setting means (for example, main CPU 101, FIG. 2) that is set to any of a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the third displacement member is switched to the first state is low. The error detecting means has the third displacement member by the drive determining means when the opening detection sensor detects that the opening degree is such that the game medium can be captured. After determining that the third displacement member is driven, it is determined whether or not the third displacement member has detected the game medium captured by the third displacement member, and in the case of a negative determination, an error is detected, and the open detection sensor determines. When it is detected that the degree of opening that cannot capture the game medium has changed from the degree of opening that can capture the game medium, the passage of the game medium is detected by the corresponding first passage detection sensor or the second passage detection sensor. It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the result has been made, and an error is detected in the case of a negative determination (for example, the main CPU 101, step S294 in FIG. 33).

According to the above configuration, it is determined that the drive determining means drives the third displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 415a) (per ordinary symbol), and the third displacement member is in the first state (ordinary electric accessory open). , The release detection sensor outputs a detection signal (non-electric accessory release) is always executed in this order, so if the above items are not executed in this order, an error signal is output. To. This makes it possible to quickly deal with fraudulent activities. Further, when the first displacement member or the second displacement member is closed, the corresponding first passage detection sensor or second passage detection sensor always detects the game medium. Therefore, if this is not the case, an error signal is signaled. Is output. This makes it possible to quickly deal with fraudulent activities.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are blade members (for example,) that can switch between an open state in which the game medium can be captured and a closed state in which the game medium cannot be captured. Each of the blade members 510 and 512) is provided, and the detection sensor is characterized in that it outputs a detection signal when the blade member has an open degree of half or more of the diameter of the game medium.

According to the above configuration, for example, the blade members (blade members 510, 512) of the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) are forcibly opened. When an act is performed, an error signal is output before the blade member is fully opened. This makes it possible to quickly deal with fraudulent activities.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming medium in the first region when the opening detection sensor does not output an off signal until a predetermined time elapses after the opening detection sensor outputs an on signal. It is characterized in that an error signal for executing an effect for prompting the firing of is output (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S286 to S294 in FIG. 33).

According to the above configuration, for example, before the end of the specific state (time saving game state), the first displacement member or the second displacement member is set to the first state (open state), and the specific state is maintained while maintaining this first open state. Shifts to the game state after the end of. Then, even if the game medium is inserted into the first displacement member or the second displacement member in the open state at an arbitrary timing in this game state, an error signal is output, for example, the first. By executing the effect of encouraging the region to launch the game medium, the player is obliged to promptly enter the game medium into the first displacement member or the second displacement member.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the special gaming state is a first special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value, and a predetermined gaming value less than that of the first special gaming state. A first state in which the game medium can be easily captured and a first state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) to which the game medium can be assigned and driven in at least the second special game state. The game state control means is played by passing a fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that can be switched between the two states and a game medium arranged in the first region and captured by the fourth displacement member. A special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that triggers the transition of the state to the first special gaming state is further provided, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is the second. The case where the passage of the game medium in the starting area is triggered is set to a higher probability than the case where the passage of the game medium in the first starting area is triggered, and the game state control means is a game in the special winning area. The gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state executed with the passage of the medium is switched in the same manner as after the end of the first special gaming state triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area. It is characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine in which a fraudulent act of prying open a second displacement member is unlikely to occur in a type 1 type 2 mixer.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory that can prevent fraudulent activities.

[Appendix 7]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during the small hit game, the blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens the open / close region, and the game ball enters the open / close region. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. As the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

In the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. When a ball is hit, a random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The display means fluctuates and stops the identification symbol, and the game is played according to the stop display mode of the identification symbol. It is to notify the person.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the so-called digital pachinko gaming machine, when the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends (when the gaming state does not shift to the high probability state), for example, the identification symbol A type of model that employs so-called electric tulip support, which makes it easy for the electric tulip to open until the number of fluctuations reaches 100, is common.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines, there are many types in which two types, a first starting port and a second starting port, are installed on the game board. In addition, the big hit triggered by the second starting opening prize is more advantageous to the player than the big hit triggered by the first starting opening winning, for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game is large, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. I'm raising it.

Here, it is conceivable to provide electric tulips at both the first starting port and the second starting port so that the electric chew support can be received. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a driving device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a driving device for an electric tulip. As the number of electric solenoids increases, not only the cost increases, but also a mechanism for releasing the heat generated from the electric solenoids is required. Therefore, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids as much as possible.

Instead of the electric tulip, a tulip that opens and closes mechanically in conjunction with the rolling of the game ball, a so-called non-electric accessory called a mechanical chew, is used as an accessory to be placed at the first start port or the second start port. It is conceivable to do.

However, adopting the mecha chew requires a mechanism that selectively opens either the first start port or the mecha chew arranged at the second start port according to the game state when the normal symbol game is won. become. Specifically, the mechanical chew opens the closed blade member in conjunction with the open blade member or the game ball passing through the predetermined area, and closes when the game ball enters the open blade member. Since the operating mechanism for causing the game is provided, it is conceivable to provide a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball to the operating mechanism of the first starting port and for sending the game ball to the operating mechanism of the second starting port. .. Here, it is conceivable to apply an electric solenoid as a drive source of the distribution mechanism, but as described above, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem, suppressing an increase in the number of electric parts, and improving the enjoyment of a game.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention can launch a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which the game medium can roll, and a game medium in the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20), a first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass, and a game medium arranged in the game area. A game predetermined to the player is triggered by either a passable second starting area (for example, a second starting port 414c), passing through the game medium in the first starting area, or passing through the game medium in the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, and FIG. 36) for determining with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state) to which value can be given. Steps S323 and S329), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and the stop display mode of the identification information display means. A game state control means for switching the game state (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13), a first state arranged in the first starting area and easy to capture the game medium, and a first state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium. With a first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that can be switched between two states and guides the game medium to the first starting region when the game medium is captured in the first state. , It is possible to switch between the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, and the game medium is captured in the first state. In this case, the first displacement member is switched to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the game medium and the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region. At the same time, the first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media by the first displacement member is interlocked with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism) that switches the second displacement member to the first state and switches from the first state to the second state by the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media. 513), a passing area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass, and a passing area arranged in the game area and protruding from the board surface of the game board. It is possible to switch between the first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passing region and the second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium by pulling it into the board surface of the game board, and it is electrically operable. It is determined whether or not to switch the third displacement member (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 415a) and the third displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the passing region. Drive determination means (for example, main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) that determines with the probability of, and drive control means that controls switching the third displacement member to the first state based on the determination of the drive determination means (for example, step S231 in FIG. 26). For example, a first path (for example, FIG. 63 (d)) including the main CPU 101) and capable of guiding the game medium to one of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism in the first state. ) Is formed, and the game medium can be guided to the other of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism in the second state (for example, the arrow of FIG. 63B). ) Is formed, and the drive control means sets the time to be in the first state shorter than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the first path as the drive mode of the third displacement member. The first drive mode (short open) and the second drive mode in which the time for the first state is set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the first path. It is characterized in that it is set to either (for example, long open) or.

According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short open), the game medium is moved from the first state (open state) to the second state (closed) before being disengaged from the third displacement member. In order to switch to the state), the game medium is conveyed to the retracted position by the third displacement member, and the third displacement member is moved from that position to move one of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism). Move to 511). Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the game medium passes through the third displacement member in the protruding state, and the other of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism (for example, the second actuating mechanism). Move to the operating mechanism 513). Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, which of the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is brought into the first state is switched depending on the driving mode of the third displacement member. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to increase the number of relatively expensive parts such as electromagnetic solenoids as in the past, and it is possible to suppress the cost increase accordingly. Moreover, since the starting area that facilitates the passage of the game medium can be switched, for example, the setting that is more advantageous to the player when passing through the second starting area than when passing through the first starting area of the game medium. It is possible to easily improve the interest of the game by devising such as.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the first passage (for example, the first passage 504) that guides the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first operating mechanism and the third displacement member capture the game medium. A second passage (for example, a second passage 505) for guiding the game medium to the second actuating mechanism is further provided, and the third displacement member has at least the entrance of the second passage open in the first state. A slide member (for example, a flat plate member 520) that closes the entrance of the second passage and opens the entrance of the first passage in the second state, and the third displacement member in the second drive mode. The game medium captured by the player passes through the slide member toward the entrance of the second passage (for example, the ball entry port 505a of the second passage), and the game medium captured by the third displacement member in the first drive mode is , Pulled toward the game board together with the slide member, passed through the upper part of the entrance of the second passage in the closed state, and headed toward the entrance of the first passage (for example, the entrance of the first passage 504a). It is a feature.

According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first driving mode (short open), the game medium is guided to the entrance of the first passage and moves to the first operating mechanism through the first passage. To do. Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second driving mode (long open), the game medium is guided to the entrance of the second passage and moves to the second operating mechanism through the second passage. Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, the driving mode of the third displacement member is switched depending on which of the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state. This makes it feasible. As a result, it is not necessary to increase the number of relatively expensive parts such as the electromagnetic solenoid as in the conventional case in order to distribute the game medium, and it is possible to suppress the cost increase accordingly. Moreover, depending on the driving mode of the third displacement member, for example, the game may be set to be more advantageous to the player when the game medium passes through the first starting area than when the game medium passes through the first starting area. It becomes easy to improve the interest.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the special gaming state is less than the first special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) and the first special gaming state in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value. A first state and a game medium that include a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) that can be given a predetermined game value, are driven in at least the second special game state, and are easy to capture the game medium. The game state control is performed by passing a fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that can be switched to a second state in which it is difficult to perform, and a game medium arranged in the game area and captured by the fourth displacement member. The means further includes a special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that triggers the transition of the gaming state to the first special gaming state, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is The case where the passage of the game medium in the second start region is triggered is set to a higher probability than the case where the passage of the game medium in the first start region is triggered, and the game state control means is the special prize. The game state after the end of the first special game state executed with the passage of the game medium in the area is referred to as after the end of the first special game state triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second start area. It is characterized by switching in the same manner.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one kind and two kinds are mixed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing an increase in electric parts and improving the enjoyment of a game.

[Appendix 8]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during the small hit game, the blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens the open / close region, and the game ball enters the open / close region. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. As the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can acquire changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

In the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. When a ball is hit, a random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The display means fluctuates and stops the identification symbol, and the game is played according to the stop display mode of the identification symbol. It is to notify the person.

[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-233375

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the so-called digital pachinko gaming machine, when the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends (when the gaming state does not shift to the high probability state), for example, the identification symbol A type of model that employs so-called electric tulip support, which makes it easy for the electric tulip to open until the number of fluctuations reaches 100, is common.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines, there are many types in which two types, a first starting port and a second starting port, are installed on the game board. In addition, the big hit triggered by the second starting opening prize is more advantageous to the player than the big hit triggered by the first starting opening winning, for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game is large, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. I'm raising it.

Here, it is conceivable to provide electric tulips at both the first starting port and the second starting port so that the electric chew support can be received. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a driving device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a driving device for an electric tulip. As the number of electric solenoids increases, not only the cost increases, but also a mechanism for releasing the heat generated from the electric solenoids is required. Therefore, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids as much as possible.

Instead of the electric tulip, a tulip that opens and closes mechanically in conjunction with the rolling of the game ball, a so-called non-electric accessory called a mechanical chew, is used as an accessory to be placed at the first start port or the second start port. It is conceivable to do.

However, adopting the mecha chew requires a mechanism that selectively opens either the first start port or the mecha chew arranged at the second start port according to the game state when the normal symbol game is won. become. Specifically, the mechanical chew opens the closed blade member in conjunction with the open blade member or the game ball passing through the predetermined area, and closes when the game ball enters the open blade member. Since the operating mechanism for causing the game is provided, it is conceivable to provide a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball to the operating mechanism of the first starting port and for sending the game ball to the operating mechanism of the second starting port. .. Here, it is conceivable to apply an electric solenoid as a drive source of the distribution mechanism, but as described above, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem, suppressing an increase in the number of electric parts, and improving the enjoyment of a game.

[Means to solve problems]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention can launch a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which the game medium can roll, and a game medium in the game area while adjusting the firing intensity of the game medium. A launching means (for example, a launching device 20), a first starting area (for example, a first starting port 414b) arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass, and a game medium arranged in the game area. A game predetermined to the player is triggered by either a passable second starting area (for example, a second starting port 414c), passing through the game medium in the first starting area, or passing through the game medium in the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, and FIG. 36) for determining with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state) to which value can be given. Steps S323 and S329), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 431) that notifies the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and the stop display mode of the identification information display means. A game state control means for switching the game state (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13), a first state arranged in the first starting area and easy to capture the game medium, and a first state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium. With a first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that can be switched between two states and guides the game medium to the first starting region when the game medium is captured in the first state. , It is possible to switch between the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the second state in which the game medium is difficult to capture, and the game medium is captured in the first state. In this case, the first displacement member is switched to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the game medium and the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region. At the same time, the first actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media by the first displacement member is interlocked with the passage of the game medium. A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism) that switches the second displacement member to the first state and switches from the first state to the second state by the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media. 513), a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) that is arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass, and a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) that is arranged on the board surface of the game board in the game area. A third displacement member that can be switched between a first state in which the game medium that has passed through the passing region can be captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and is electrically operable (for example, With a predetermined probability of switching the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, triggered by the passage of the game medium through the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111 and the electric tulip 523) and the passing area. The drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) to be determined, and the drive control means (for example, the main) that controls switching the third displacement member to the first state based on the determination of the drive determination means. The third displacement member includes a CPU 101), and the third displacement member has a first path (FIG. 64) capable of guiding the game medium to one of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism in the first state. A second path (of FIG. 64 (c)) capable of forming the arrow (arrow) of (d) and guiding the game medium to the other of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism in the second state. The drive control means has an arrow), and sets the time to be in the first state to be shorter than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the game board as the drive mode of the third displacement member. The first drive mode (short open) and the second drive mode in which the time for the first state is set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the game board (short open). For example, it is characterized in that it is set to either (long open) or.

According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short open), the game medium captured by the third displacement member does not move to the game board side and the game medium is on the game board. It moves to one of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism (for example, the first actuating mechanism 511) through the first path. Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the third displacement member passes through the base end portions of the pair of blade members and the other of the first actuating mechanism and the second actuating mechanism (for example, for example. It moves to the second actuating mechanism 513). Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, which of the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is brought into the first state is switched depending on the driving mode of the third displacement member. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to increase the number of relatively expensive parts such as electromagnetic solenoids as in the past, and it is possible to suppress the cost increase accordingly. Moreover, since the starting area that facilitates the passage of the game medium can be switched, for example, the setting that is more advantageous to the player when passing through the second starting area than when passing through the first starting area of the game medium. It is possible to easily improve the interest of the game by devising such as.

Further, in the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention has a first passage (for example, a first passage 504) that guides a game medium that has passed through the first path to the first operating mechanism, and a first passage that has passed through the second path. A second passage (for example, a second passage 505) that guides the game medium captured by the three displacement members to the second operating mechanism is further provided, and the third displacement member rotates along the board surface of the game board. It is provided with a pair of blade members (blade members 524, 524) that are possibly arranged and that form the first state when the tips are separated from each other and form the second state when the tips are close to each other. Each of the pair of blade members has a guide member (for example, guide plates 524a and 524a) extending toward the game board at the base end portion, and the guide members are integrally provided with the game medium in the first state. A guide path is formed to guide the second passage arranged on the back side of the game board, and in the second state, the game medium can fall between the base ends of the pair of blade members separated from each other. In the first path, the game medium on the pair of blade members in the first state passes through the guide path and enters the second passage (for example, the second passage entry port 505a). In the second path, the game medium on the pair of blade members falls between the base ends of the pair of blade members immediately before the transition from the first state to the second state. It is characterized in that the dropped game medium is guided to the first passage.

According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short open), the game medium captured by the pair of blade members (blade member 524, 524) is the pair of blade members. It passes between the base ends, is guided to the entrance of the first passage through the second path, and moves to the first actuating mechanism through the first passage. Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the game medium captured by the pair of blade members (blade member 524, 524) is a guide member (for example, guide plates 524a, 524a). It is guided to the entrance of the second passage (for example, the ball entrance 505a of the second passage) through the guide path formed by, and moves to the second actuating mechanism through the second passage. Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, the first driving mode of the third displacement member determines which of the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state. It becomes possible to switch between the two, and it is not necessary to increase the number of relatively expensive parts such as the electromagnetic solenoid as in the conventional case, and the cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the special gaming state is less than the first special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) and the first special gaming state in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value. A first state and a game medium that include a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) that can be given a predetermined game value, are driven in at least the second special game state, and are easy to capture the game medium. The game state control is performed by passing a fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that can be switched to a second state in which it is difficult to perform, and a game medium arranged in the game area and captured by the fourth displacement member. The means further includes a special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that triggers the transition of the gaming state to the first special gaming state, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is The case where the passage of the game medium in the second start region is triggered is set to a higher probability than the case where the passage of the game medium in the first start region is triggered, and the game state control means is the special prize. The game state after the end of the first special game state executed with the passage of the game medium in the area is referred to as after the end of the first special game state triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second start area. It is characterized by switching in the same manner.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one kind and two kinds are mixed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing an increase in electric parts and improving the enjoyment of a game.

1 Pachinko game machine 20 Launcher 40 Game board 41 Game area 50 Liquid crystal display device 70 Payout unit 71 Payout device 100 Main control circuit 101 Main CPU
103 Main RAM
111 Ordinary electric accessory solenoid 112 Large winning opening solenoid 113 Count sensor 114d General winning ball sensor 115 Ball passage detection sensor 116a Central starting opening winning ball sensor 116b First starting opening winning ball sensor 116c Second starting opening winning ball sensor 117 Winning opening Solenoid 118 Opening and closing winning opening solenoid 119 V winning ball sensor 120 Opening and closing winning opening count sensor 121 Distribution solenoid 122 Ordinary electric accessory entry sensor 200 Sub control circuit 201 Sub CPU
202 Program ROM
203 work RAM
210 Display control circuit 300 Discharge / launch control circuit 413 Central base plate 414a Central start port 414b 1st start port 414c 2nd start port 415a Normal electric accessory 415b 1st non-electric accessory 415c 2nd non-electric accessory 416 Ball passage Detector 417 Shutter 418 Large winning opening 419a, 419b, 419c General winning opening 420 Opening and closing winning opening 421 Attacker 422 V winning device 423 Guideway 424 V winning opening 426 Movable member 431 Special symbol display device 433 Special symbol hold display device 434 Normal symbol Display device 435 Ordinary symbol hold display device 450 Touch sensor 500 Guide path 501 Slope portion 504 1st passage 504a 1st passage entry port 505 2nd passage 505a 2nd passage entry port 506 Sorting device 507 Sorting plate 510, 512 Blade member 511 First actuating mechanism 513 Second actuating mechanism 520 Flat plate member

Claims (2)

A first variable winning device provided with a first displacement member capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which it is difficult to win and a second state in which it is easy to win.
A second variable winning device provided with a second displacement member capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which it is difficult to win and a second state in which it is easy to win.
The first starting area provided in the first variable winning device and
A second starting area provided in the second variable winning device and
A game state control means that can control one of a plurality of game states,
A first variable display game control means capable of executing a first variable display game based on the passage of the game ball through the first starting region, and
A second variable display game control means capable of executing a second variable display game based on the passage of the game ball through the second starting region, and
In a game machine provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means for executing an effect.
The game state control means
Normal game state and
The first specific gaming state in which the first displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than in the normal gaming state, and
It is possible to control the second specific gaming state in which the second displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state.
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the second displacement member is opened.
When the second displacement member is opened in the first specific gaming state, the suggestion effect can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that. A third variable winning device provided with a third displacement member capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which it is difficult to win and a second state in which it is easy to win.
A specific area provided in the third variable winning device is provided.
When the first variable display game or the second variable display game has a special result, it is possible to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
When the second variation display game has a predetermined result, by setting the third displacement member in the second state, a predetermined game state capable of easily winning a game ball in the specific area is generated. It is possible to let
The specific area can generate the special gaming state based on the passage of the gaming ball.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.
The special gaming state generated based on the passage to the specific area shifts to the second special gaming state rather than the special gaming state generated based on the first variable display game having the special result. High percentage,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.